One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Insight was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Introduction
i
０９／０１／１３ ０９：１６：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００２
2010 Insight
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
０８／１２／２７ １１：２６：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００３
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
on the vehicle.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Safety Labels
Instructions
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２６：２２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００４
2010 Insight
(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)
(fluid capacities and tire pressures)
(main controls)
(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)
(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and other convenience items)
(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)
(engine and transmission operation)
(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)
(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)
(warranty and contact information)
(how to order)
(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)
Contents
............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety .5
................................................................................................................................................Index .I
Service Information Summary
...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance .3
.......Instruments and Controls .59
............Features . 159
.......................................................................Before Driving . 283
.........................................................................................Driving . 301
.................................................Maintenance . 335
..............................................Technical Information . 415
..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 431
..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 435
........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 385
1
０９／０１／１３ ０９：１６：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００６
00X31-TM8-6000
© 2009 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2010 Insight Online Reference Owner's Manual
2010 Insight
Owner's Identification Form
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
the multi-information display, and
how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.
Overview of Contents
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Before Driving
Driving
Maintenance
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Technical Information
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Features
2
０８／１２／２７ １１：２６：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００７
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
If equipped:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
DOOR LOCK TAB
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
ECON BUTTON
USB ADAPTER CABLE
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
AUDIO SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
(P.166)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(P.198)
PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.316)
GAUGES(P.72)
(P.287)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.10)
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P.62)
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.10)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.144)
(P.130)
(P.130)
(P.146)
(P.124)
(P.153)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(CVT)(P.311)
(P.122)(P.72, 75)
(P.183, 191)
(P.160)
０８／１２／２７ １１：２６：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００８
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1:
2:
3:
If equipped.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL
BUTTONS
ECON BUTTON
(P.251)
(P.73)
(P.256)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.166)
CLOCK
(P.254)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (P.198)
(P.252)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.259)
(P.259)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
KNOB
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA
) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB
HORN
(P.35)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.252)
(P.333)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.118)
(P.144)
(P.124)
(P.125)
(P.153)
(P.122)
(P.122)
(P.117)
(P.121)
(P.76)
(P.123/145)
(P.76)
2
3
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
2
2
2
1
2
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００９
2010 Insight
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 8
.......................................Seat Belts . 9
.........................................Airbags . 10
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 21
..Seat Belt System Components . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 23
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 24
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 25
......Airbag System Components . 25
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 33
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 34
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 35
.............................Airbag Service . 36
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 38
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 38
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 41
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 41
...Additional Safety Precautions . 42
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 43
.......................Protecting Infants . 43
.........Protecting Small Children . 44
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45
....................Installing a Child Seat . 46
...............................With LATCH . 47
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49
..............................With a Tether . 50
...........Protecting Larger Children . 52
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52
..................Using a Booster Seat . 53
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 54
...Additional Safety Precautions . 55
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
...................................Safety Labels . 57
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１０
2010 Insight
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
17
38 55
Important Safety Precautions
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and DriveRestrain All Children
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
6
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１１
2010 Insight
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).375
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Important Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１２
2010 Insight
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
8
(2)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(2)
(10)
(8)
(12)
(5)
(11)
(1)
(8) (3)
(9)
(9)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zone
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１３
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１４
2010 Insight
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side or front impact (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
28
32
33
Airbags
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１５
2010 Insight
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards.
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０８／１２／２７ １１：２７：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１６
2010 Insight
−See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Your vehicle has a door/
hatch open indicator (red)
on the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the hatch is not
tightly closed.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door/
hatch open indicator works.
Your vehicle also has a door and
hatch open indicator on the multi-
information display to indicate when
a specific door or the hatch is not
tightly closed. You will see the
appropriate indicator(s) for each
condition.
You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door or the hatch with the key in
the ON (II) position.
The above illustration shows that all
doors and the hatch are open.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
hatch are closed and locked.
38 55
68
130
Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１７
2010 Insight
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page .
Locking the doors and the hatch also
helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
hatch when you come to a stop.
When one or more doors or the
hatch are not tightly closed, the
corresponding indicator for each
condition will come on.
Theaboveexampleshowsthefront
right and rear left doors, and the
hatch open.
When the hatch is not tightly closed,
this indicator will come on. 106
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１８
2010 Insight
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
125
138
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：１７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００１９
2010 Insight
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
138
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２０
2010 Insight
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
139
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness, and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２１
2010 Insight
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
CONTINUED
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２２
2010 Insight
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
21
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
18
RELEASE BUTTONS
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：４４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２３
2010 Insight
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２４
2010 Insight
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Adults and Teens
20
０８／１２／２７ １１：２８：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２５
2010 Insight
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
In addition to the seat belt reminder
indicator in the instrument panel,
you will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message. This remains
displayed if you ignore it and do not
fasten the seat belt while driving.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
The seat belt system includes an
indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
30 31
CONTINUED
Seat Belt System Components Seat Belt Indicator
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：０８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２６
2010 Insight
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
17
49
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
22
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２７
2010 Insight
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
do not deploy
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：２３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２８
2010 Insight
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
369
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
24
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：２９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００２９
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
(8)(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(10)
(9)
(11)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(10) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(11) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３０
2010 Insight
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Your Airbag System includes:
28
32
33
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
(12) Front Impact Sensors
(13) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(14) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(15) Side Curtain Airbags
(16) Rear Safing Sensor
(13)
(12)
(15)
(16)
(14)
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３１
2010 Insight
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the
frontpassenger’sseatbeltare
latched or unlatched (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight
of an infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Sensors that can detect whether
a child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the
control unit to turn the airbag
off (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
23
32
21
30
30
34
34
35
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３２
2010 Insight
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed. 35
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
０８／１２／２７ １１：２９：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３３
2010 Insight
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３４
2010 Insight
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３５
2010 Insight
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
35
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３６
2010 Insight
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
32
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：２９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３７
2010 Insight
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
34
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３８
2010 Insight
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display.
65
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator
Works
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
34
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００３９
2010 Insight
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
On vehicle with navigation system
On vehicle without navigation system
Canada
U.S.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３０：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４０
2010 Insight
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
Airbag Service
36
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４１
2010 Insight
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not expose the f ront passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not remove or modify a f ront
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４２
2010 Insight
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children age 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properlyrestrainedwhentheyridein
a vehicle.
43 51
52 55
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Protecting Children General Guidelines
38
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４３
2010 Insight
−
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page ), please
follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
35
52
CONTINUED
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Small Children
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Infants
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４４
2010 Insight
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
U.S. Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
40
SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４５
2010 Insight
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
52
18
17
138
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４６
2010 Insight
−
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces/
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle. Teach your children not to
play in or around vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the hatch, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
49 50
131
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is f ully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Lock all doors and the hatch when
your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
42
０８／１２／２７ １１：３１：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４７
2010 Insight
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in
a f orward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-f acing child seat in the front
seat.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４８
2010 Insight
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
farforward,orthechild’sheadis
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
44
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００４９
2010 Insight
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
35
Selecting a Child Seat
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to f it the child.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
1.
2.
3.
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５０
2010 Insight
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbeseriouslyinjuredinacrash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for a rear-
facing child seat.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is f irmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
3.
2.
46
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：３２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５１
2010 Insight
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS
Rigid type
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５２
2010 Insight
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Pushandpullthechildseat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
6.
5.
4.
7.
139
Installing a Child Seat
48
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５３
2010 Insight
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
０８／１２／２７ １１：３２：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５４
2010 Insight
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
50
ANCHORAGE POINTS
ANCHOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５５
2010 Insight
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
1.
2.
3.
49
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Outer Position Center PositionTETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER STRAP HOOK
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５６
2010 Insight
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
52
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５７
2010 Insight
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60lbs).Besuretocheckcurrent
laws in the states, provinces and
territories where you intend to drive.3.
4.
5.
45
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５８
2010 Insight
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
17 52
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children
54
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００５９
2010 Insight
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６０
2010 Insight
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
With the hatch open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
hatch open, open all the windows,
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
56
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３３：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６１
2010 Insight
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
DASHBOARD
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISORS
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６２
2010 Insight
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 60
............................Instrument Panel . 61
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62
.............................................Gauges . 72
.............Multi-Information Display . 75
Controls Near the Steering
.........................................Wheel . 116
Windshield Wipers and
.....................................Washers . 117
.......Turn Signals and Headlights . 118
.........Daytime Running Lights . 120
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 121
...............Hazard Warning Button . 122
...............Rear Window Defogger . 123
...................................Econ Button . 124
......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 125
.............................Keys and Locks . 126
......................Immobilizer System . 127
..............................Ignition Switch . 128
....................................Door Locks . 130
............Childproof Door Locks . 131
.....................Remote Transmitter . 132
..............................................Hatch . 136
................Unlocking the Hatch . 137
...............................................Seats . 138
...........Front Seat Adjustments . 138
Driver’s Seat Height
............................Adjustment . 138
........................Head Restraints . 139
.Folding the Rear Seats Down . 142
......................................Armrest . 143
...........................................Mirrors . 144
..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 144
..............Power Mirror Heaters . 145
............................Power Windows . 146
...............................Parking Brake . 148
.........Interior Convenience Items . 149
.....................Cargo Area Cover . 150
...............Under Floor Storages . 152
...Floor Storage Compartment . 152
.....................Beverage Holders . 153
........Accessory Power Sockets . 153
.............Console Compartment . 154
..................................Glove Box . 154
...............................Center Tray . 155
..........................Center Pockets . 155
..................................Coat Hook . 156
..................................Sun Visors . 156
............................Vanity Mirror . 156
...............................Interior Lights . 157
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
59
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：１７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６４
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped:
Control Locations
60
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
DOOR LOCK TAB
GAUGES
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
ECON BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
PADDLE SHIFTERS
USB ADAPTER CABLE
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
(P.287)
(P.316)
(P.311)
(P.160)
(P.35)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.72)
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS(P.62)
(P.124)
(P.130)
(P.130)
(P.146)
(P.183,191)
(P.148)
(P.122)
(P.72, 75)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.166, 198)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
Model with navigation system is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６５
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
61
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(AMBER)
VSA OFF INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (RED)
DOOR/HATCH OPEN
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
IMA SYSTEM
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
INDICATOR
(P.64)
(P.65, 332)
(P.63)
(P.66)
(P.62, 403)
(P.63, 402)
: If equipped
(P.62)
(P.64)
(P.63, 404)
(P.65)
(P.68)
(P.68)
(P.69)
(P.64)
(P.69)
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.67)
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR(P.67)
(P.70)
(P.66)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.69)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.69)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.62, 401)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/
TPMS INDICATOR
12 VOLT BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.70)
ECON MODE INDICATOR (P.71)
(P.70)
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.65, 332)
(P.66, 321, 322)
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６６
2010 Insight
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals, and you
will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or
‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, and you
will see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL
LEVEL’’ message on the multi-
information display. For more
information, see page .
21
403
401
Instrument Panel Indicators
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
62
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６７
2010 Insight
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page ).
This indicator has two functions:
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the brakes
and tires.
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the 12 volt battery
is not being charged, and you will
also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. For more
information, see page .
1.
2.
404
402
148126
Instrument Panel Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
12 Volt Battery Charging
System Indicator
Instruments and Controls
63
U.S. Canada
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６８
2010 Insight
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and START (III) position.
When the brake system indicator
(amber) comes on and stays on,
there is a problem with the Creep
Aid System or Brake Assist (the
normal brake operates properly).
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer. For more information, see
page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display. For more
information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. For more
information, see page .
324
89
326 34
Instrument Panel Indicators
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
64
U.S. Canada
０８／１２／２７ １１：３４：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００６９
2010 Insight
If equipped
If equipped
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. For more information, see
page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal driving ability, but will not
have VSA traction and stability
enhancement. For more information,
see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. You will also
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
OFF’’ message on the multi-
information display. For more
information, see page .34
332
332
332
Instrument Panel Indicators
VSA Off IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System IndicatorSide Airbag Off
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
65
U.S. Canada
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７０
2010 Insight
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service.
Refer to page for more
information.
If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, it indicates a problem in the
integrated motor assist (IMA)
system. With the IMA indicator on,
the vehicle may not accelerate as it
normally does. Have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK IMA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
See pages and .
1.
2.
321 322
328
412
387
329
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
IMA System Indicator
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
66
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７１
2010 Insight
If the indicator begins to blink or
stays on, you will also see a ‘‘WATER
TEMP HOT’’ message on the multi-
information display. This warning
will alert you that the engine should
be cooled down.
This indicator shows the
temperature of the engine coolant. It
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and goes off after a few
seconds. In normal driving
conditions, this indicator should not
blink or stay on. In severe driving
conditions, such as very hot weather
or a long period of uphill driving, this
indicator may blink. This means the
engine coolant temperature is high.
If the indicator begins to blink while
you are driving, be sure to slow down
to prevent overheating. If the
indicator stays on, pull safely to the
side of the road and turn off the
engine. See page for instructions
and precautions on checking the
engine’s cooling system.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
This indicator shows the
temperature of the engine coolant. If
there is no problem, this indicator
comes on when the engine is cold. If
itcomesonwhentheengineiswarm
(normal operating temperature),
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer as soon as possible.
398
Instrument Panel Indicators
High Temperature
Indicator
Low Temperature
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
67
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７２
2010 Insight
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will stay on,
but should go off after driving a
short distance. If it does not go off,
or comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be turned off,
making the vehicle harder to steer.
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage
to the steering box caused by
overheating.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
This indicator comes on red if any
door or the hatch lid is not closed
tightly.
You will also see a corresponding
indicator(s) on the multi-information
display to indicate which door and/
or the hatch is not closed tightly (see
page ).12
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
Door/Hatch Open
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７３
2010 Insight
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
363 365
256
256
119
120
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
69
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７４
2010 Insight
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comesonasareminderthatyou
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page ) to see the message (see
page ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page .
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 1.8 U.S. gal (6.9
)offuel
remaining in the tank.
76
89
255
Low Fuel Indicator System Message
Indicator
Security System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
70
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：３５：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７５
2010 Insight
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. When you turn the econ
mode on by pressing the ECON
button with the ignition switch in the
ON (II) position, this indicator will
come on.
You will also see the symbol on the
multi-information display with ECON
ON or ECON OFF (see page ).75
ECON Mode Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
71
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：００ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７６
2010 Insight
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per hour
(mph) depending on the selected
speedometer display. You can switch
the display between km/h and mph
(see page ).
The speedometer also has an
ambient meter. The color of the
ambient meter changes
automatically according to your
driving style (see page ).
You can customize the setting of the
ambient meter (see page ).
73
306
103
Gauges
Speedometer/Ambient Meter
72
U.S. model is shown.
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
SPEEDOMETER/AMBIENT METER
CHARGE/ASSIST GAUGE
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB SEL/RESET KNOB
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７７
2010 Insight
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
To switch the lower segment of the
multi-information display between
the odometer with the outside
temperature and trip meter with the
outside temperature, press the sel/
reset knob repeatedly. For more
information, see page .
Eachtimeyoupressandholdthe
km/mile change knob, the
speedometer reading switches
between miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h).
78
Fuel GaugeSel/Reset Knob Km/Mile Change Knob
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
73
SEL/RESET KNOB
KM/MILE CHANGE KNOB
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７８
2010 Insight
This gauge shows you the charge/
discharge status of the Integrated
Motor Assist (IMA). When the IMA
is assisting the engine, the pointer
stays in the assist gauge (upper part
of the gauge). When the IMA
battery is being charged, the pointer
stays in the charge gauge (lower part
of the gauge).
You can also check the status of the
IMA system function on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If the IMA battery is too hot or too
cold, the IMA system limits the IMA
battery’s output power to protect the
battery. This disables the IMA assist
and auto idle stop, even though the
battery level indicator on the multi-
information display may show that
the battery is well-charged (see page
). Therefore, if the motor assist
is frequently used, the battery
becomes hot and starts to limit its
output power.
It takes a short time to normalize the
IMA battery’s output power
depending on the weather.
84
85
Charge/Assist Gauge
Gauges
74
IMA ASSIST GAUGE
IMA CHARGE GAUGE
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００７９
2010 Insight
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
you will see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
These messages go off several
seconds after the key is inserted into
the ignition switch.
There are three types of messages:
normal display messages, engine oil
life and maintenance messages, and
system messages.
You can select the displayed
language and also customize some
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel (see page ).
You will see an ‘‘ECON ON’’ or
‘‘ECON OFF’’ message on the multi-
information display according to the
previous ECON setting when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position (see page ).
76
124
CONTINUED
Normal Display Messages
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
75
ECON is On.
ECON is Off.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８０
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
▲▼
The multi-information display
changes to the blank display shown
above several seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on the
next page each time you press the
INFO ( / ) button or the SEL/
RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
76
U.S. model is shown.
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO ( / ) BUTTON
Models with cruise control
SEL/RESET BUTTON
Models without cruise control
INFO BUTTONS ( / )
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８１
2010 Insight
In the normal display mode, the
upper and middle segments display
trip computer information, such as
fuel economy or average speed. The
lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside
temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s).
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page ).
The multi-information display
consists of an upper segment, a
middle segment and a lower
segment.
88
91
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
77
MIDDLE
SEGMENT
U.S. model is shown.
LOWER
SEGMENT
UPPER
SEGMENT
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８２
2010 Insight
＊
▼
▲
＊
Multi-Information Display
78
U.S. model is shown.
:
This display will be shown when the
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink is activated.
IMA System Power
Flow Monitor/
IMA Battery Level
Indicator
(See page 84/85)
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
HFL (Seepage87)
Average Fuel
Economy Record
(See page 81)
Engine Oil Life
(See page 80)
Outside Temperature
(See page 80)
Trip Computer (See page 81)
Eco Guide
Feedback
Monitor
(See page 81)
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８３
2010 Insight
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page ).
To reset a trip meter, display it, then
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
99
Odometer Trip Meter
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
79
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
ODOMETER
U.S. model is shown.
U.S.
CANADA
０８／１２／２７ １１：３６：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８４
2010 Insight
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page ).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
This shows the remaining engine oil
life. It shows 100% after the engine
oil is replaced and the display is reset.
The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
For more information, see page .337
98
Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life
Multi-Information Display
80
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S. CANADA
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８５
2010 Insight
Eco guide feedback monitor consists
of three parts. The eco-drive score
display shows the accumulated eco
score for one driving cycle. The
acceleration monitor shows
acceleration efficiency. The
deceleration monitor shows
deceleration efficiency. See page
for more information.
The average fuel economy records
display shows the average fuel
economy (0) for the current driving
cycle and (1-3) for the last three
driving cycles in mpg (U.S. models)
or l/100 km (Canadian models).
Indicators in the trip computer show:
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
Instant Fuel Economy
305
CONTINUED
Eco Guide Feedback Monitor Average Fuel Economy Records Trip Computer
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
81
U.S. model is shown.
DECELERATION
MONITOR
ACCELERATION
MONITOR
LATEST
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY
PAST AVERAGE
FUEL ECONOMY
ECO-DRIVE SCORE DISPLAY
U.S. CANADA
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８６
2010 Insight
Mile indication (U.S. models)
Kilometer indication (Canadian models)
Average Fuel Economy A
Average Fuel Economy B
: This shows your vehicle’s instant
fuel economy in mpg.
: This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset trip computer A.
: This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset trip computer B.
You can customize the Trip A and
Average Fuel Economy A reset
condition on the multi-information
display (see page ).
: This shows your vehicle’s instant
fuel economy in L/100 km.
When you turn off the engine, the
instant fuel economy (mpg or L/100
km) is also reset.
The average fuel economy will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s 12 volt battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
99
Average Fuel Economy A/BInstant Fuel Economy
Multi-Information Display
82
U.S.
CANADA
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY A
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY B
CANADAU.S.
INSTANT
FUEL
ECONOMY
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８７
2010 Insight
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
If you want to reset the ELAPSED
TIME manually, go to the trip
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
andpressandholdtheSEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset conditions on the multi-
information display (see page ).
To reset the AVG. SPEED reading,
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
100
ELAPSED TIMERANGE AVG. SPEED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
83
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８８
2010 Insight
The IMA system power flow monitor
shows the status of the IMA system.
The energy source, and powering
status of the engine and IMA motor
(engine operation icon and IMA
battery) are represented by arrows
on the display The battery level
indicator shows the state of charge
of the IMA battery.
The table in the next column shows
the basic monitoring display
examples and their descriptions.
ExampleDescriptions
Only IMA motor is
powering the vehicle and
IMA battery is discharging.
IMA motor is assisting the
engine with powering the
vehicle. IMA battery is
discharging and the system
is consuming fuel.
IMA system is charging
IMA battery.
Only engine is powering
vehicle. The system is
consuming fuel.
Engine is powering vehicle
and IMA system is charging
IMA battery. The system is
consuming fuel.
IMA System Power Flow Monitor
Powering Status
Multi-Information Display
84
IMA BATTERY/BATTERY
LEVEL INDICATOR
POWER FLOW
ENGINE
OPERATION
ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：４４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００８９
2010 Insight
The IMA battery level indicator
shows you the state of charge of the
battery for the Integrated Motor
Assist (IMA). This battery is
recharged and discharged by the
IMA motor depending on the driving
conditions.
The position of the battery level
reading shows the state of charge of
the IMA battery. When the battery
level reading is high, the IMA
battery is well charged. There are
seven positions (Level 0-Level 6) of
the battery level reading.
The battery level reading may drop
near the bottom under driving
conditions that require IMA motor
assistance for a long time, such as
prolonged acceleration or climbing a
long hill.
The IMA motor will recharge the
battery as you continue driving.
CONTINUED
IMA Battery Level Indicator
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
85
LEVEL READING
Lowest
level of
state of
charge
Highest
level of
state of
charge
IMA BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９０
2010 Insight
On vehicle with paddle shifters
On vehicle without paddle shifters
The IMA battery is charged at a
higher rate when the transmission is
in L (Low) mode (see page ).
The battery level gauge does not
read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
If the battery is mostly discharged,
the Auto Idle Stop function is
disabled (see page ).
The IMA battery is charged at a
higher rate when the transmission is
in LOW (L) range (see page ).
Since the level is not read directly,
small sensing errors can, over time,
cause the gauge to read higher than
the actual battery level. The system
will then perform a correction, and
the battery level gauge reading will
drop suddenly. When this happens,
IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop are
disabled until the IMA battery is
sufficiently recharged by normal
driving.
This correction of the battery level
gauge is normal and does not
indicate a problem. If the IMA
battery develops a problem or
becomes deteriorated, the IMA
system indicator will come on. If this
happens, have the vehicle checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
320
314
322
Multi-Information Display
86
０８／１２／２７ １１：３７：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９１
2010 Insight
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website. In
Canada, visit , or call 1-
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL) system
without touching your cell phone.
259
www.honda.ca
On models with navigation system
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
87
０８／１２／２７ １１：３８：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９２
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
▲▼If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.
To switch the message(s) before 5
seconds have elapsed, press the
INFO( / )buttononthesteering
wheel.
Even if you press the INFO ( / )
button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
you can see the corresponding
message(s) again by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.
Here is a list of all messages:
System Messages
Multi-Information Display
88
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：３８：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９３
2010 Insight
▲▼
You can customize some vehicle
control settings. To enter the
customizing mode, press and hold
either INFO button ( / ) for more
than 3 seconds. To change the
settings, the ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
If you try to enter the customizing
mode while the vehicle is moving,
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFTTOPARKTOCHANGE
SETTINGS’’ message and you
cannot change the settings.
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
customize.
CONTINUED
Customized Settings
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
91
０８／１２／２７ １１：３８：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９６
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−〜± 〜
−〜± 〜
＊
TRIP B
15 sec
Changes the language used in the display.
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
Changes the displayed measurement on the multi-
information display.
Turn the ambient meter feature on or off.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
5°F 0°F 5°F
(U.S.)
3°C 0°C 3°C
(Canada)
ON
OFF
IGN OFF
TRIP A
AUTO
KM
MILES
ON
OFF
60 sec
30 sec
METER SETUP
(P.96)
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.104)
97
98
99
100
101
103
105
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
DISPLAY KM/MILES
METER COLOR CHANGE
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
Default setting:
Description Setting OptionGroup Setup PageMenu Item
Multi-Information Display
92
０８／１２／２７ １１：３８：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９７
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Menu Item Description Setting OptionGroup Setup Page
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
Changes when the doors automatically lock.
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter in a first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD
OFF
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR
ALL DOORS
ON
OFF
90 sec
60 sec
30 sec
SET
CANCEL
DOOR SETUP
(P.106)
DEFAULT ALL
(P.115)
107
108
110
112
113
115
Default setting:
SHIFT TO P DRIVER DOOR /
ALL DOORS
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
93
０８／１２／２７ １１：３８：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９８
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲
▼
▲▼
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
METER SETUP
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO ( / ) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shownonthenextpage.Pressthe
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns to
the normal display.
You can also use the select/reset
knob in the instrument panel. Turn
the knob to select a setting and press
it to enter your selection.
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page .
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR SETUP
115
Customize Settings
Multi-Information Display
94
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ００９９
2010 Insight
▼
▲
▲▼
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
95
NORMAL DISPLAY
CANADA
U.S.
METER SETUP
Seepage96
LIGHTING SETUP
Seepage104
DOOR SETUP
Seepage106
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the INFO button .
: Press and hold the INFO ( / ) button.
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１００
2010 Insight
▲
▼
▲▼
▼
▲
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
Here are the four custom settings
forthemetersetup:
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
METER COLOR CHANGE
DISPLAY KM/MILES
ELAPSED TIME RESET
Meter Setup
Multi-Information Display
96
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the INFO button .
See page 103
Seepage101
See page 97 See page 98
Seepage99
See page
100
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０１
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
Language Selection
There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
97
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：３２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０２
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the setting.
Multi-Information Display
98
Canadian models
Canadian modelsU.S. models
U.S. models
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０３
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
To cause Trip A and average fuel for
trip A to reset every time you refuel
your vehicle, follow these
instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
Trip A Reset With Refuel
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
99
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０４
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
−
−
−
Elapsed Time Reset
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
IGN OFF The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B The elapsed time is reset
when Trip B is reset.
Multi-Information Display
100
０８／１２／２７ １１：３９：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０５
2010 Insight
▲▼
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
To change the displayed
measurement in the trip computer
and trip information and to switch
between kilometers and miles, follow
these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Display Km/Miles
Instruments and Controls
101
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０６
2010 Insight
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select AUTO, KM, or MILES by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
AUTO: When you press the km/mile
change knob in the instrument panel
to switch the speedometer reading
between miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h), the
displayed measurement in the trip
computer and trip information, also
switches to kilometers or miles
depending on the selected
speedometer reading.
KM: The displayed measurement in
the trip computer and trip
information is set to kilometers.
MILES: The displayed measurement
in the trip computer and trip
information is set to miles.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘DISPLAY KM/MILES
SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message
appears, go back to ‘‘DISPLAY KM/
MILES’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
Multi-Information Display
102
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０７
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
You can turn the ambient meter
feature on or off (see page ).
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘METER COLOR CHANGE
SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ message
appears, go back to ‘‘METER
COLOR CHANGE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
72
Meter Color Change
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
103
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０８
2010 Insight
▲
▼
▲▼
▼
▲
There is one custom setting for the
lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Lighting Setup
Multi-Information Display
104
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the INFO button .
See page
105
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１０９
2010 Insight
▲
▼
▲▼
Interior Light Dimming Time
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors. To change how long
thelightsstayonbeforetheyfade
out, follow these instructions:
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /
) button repeatedly.
Select the desired setting (15 SEC,
30 SEC, or 60 SEC) by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
105
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１０
2010 Insight
▲
▼
▲▼
▲
▼
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Here are the five custom settings for
the door setup:
While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO ( /
) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO ( / ) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
Door Setup
Multi-Information Display
106
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the INFO button .
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
See page
107
See page
108
See page
113
See page
112
See page
110
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：４４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１１
2010 Insight
−
▲▼
▲▼
−
−
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
WITH VEHICLE SPEED
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
16 km/h).
OFF
The auto door lock mode is
deactivated all the time.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
107
A/T model is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１２
2010 Insight
−
−
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
There are five possible settings you
can choose from:
DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to Park.
ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P
All the doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to Park.
Auto Door Unlock
Multi-Information Display
108
０８／１２／２７ １１：４０：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１３
2010 Insight
−
−
▲▼
▲▼
−
DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF
The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position.
ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF All
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button.
For example, you choose ‘‘DRIVER
DOOR with SHIFT to P,’’ you will
seetheabovedisplay.
OFF The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
109
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１４
2010 Insight
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when
you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter or the key, follow
these instructions.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
If you choose ‘‘ALL DOORS With
IGN OFF,’’ you will see the above
display.
Door Lock Mode
Multi-Information Display
110
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１５
2010 Insight
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘DOOR
LOCK MODE’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
111
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１６
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the trunk
arelockedandthesecuritysystem
has set (see page ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
255
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
Multi-Information Display
112
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１７
2010 Insight
▲▼
Security Relock Timer
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors and the fuel fill door,
automatically relock, and the
security system sets.
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
113
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１８
2010 Insight
▲▼
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO ( / ) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
114
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１１９
2010 Insight
▲▼ ▲▼
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO ( / ) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
To set the default settings, press the
INFO ( / ) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
the default all setting display.
DEFAULT ALL
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
115
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２０
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped
1:
2:
3:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
116
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
HORN
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
MULTI-INFORMATION BUTTONS
ECON BUTTON
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR
CLOCK
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
BLUETOOTH
HANDS-FREE LINK SYSTEM
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.333)
(P.251)
(P.259)
(P.259)
(P.252)
(P.254)
(P.166)
(P.256)
(P.198)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM /
AUDIO SYSTEM
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.118)
(P.144)
(P.124)
(P.125)
(P.153)
(P.123/145)
(P.121)
EX model with navigation system is shown.
(P.117)
(P.76)
(P.76)
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
０８／１２／２７ １１：４１：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２１
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay ( position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On all models except LX
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
Windshield Washer
INT
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Instruments and Controls
117
ADJUSTMENT RING
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２２
2010 Insight
Turn Signal
OFF
Parking and interior lights
Headlights on
High Beams
Flashhighbeams
Rotate the switch
counterclockwise also to spray the
window washer and turn the wiper
on.
Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
OFF
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
3.
1.
2.
Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
118
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２３
2010 Insight
−− −Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the switch to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Push the left lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
69
Turn Signal Headlights High Beams
Turn Signals and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
119
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２４
2010 Insight
With the headlight switch off or in
the position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights
120
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２５
2010 Insight
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or position. Turning the
knob to the right until you hear a
tone will cancel the reduced
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Turn the
knob to adjust the brightness with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position and the parking lights on.
When you turn the knob, the multi-
information display changes to
vertical bars that show you the
current level.
You will hear a tone when you reach
the maximum or minimum
brightness. The brightness level
goes out about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting.
CONTINUED
Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
121
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２６
2010 Insight
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Push the button next to the audio
system to turn on the hazard
warning lights (four-way flashers).
This causes all four outside turn
signal lights and both turn signal
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
122
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：３８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２７
2010 Insight
The defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature
(over 32°F, 0°C).
Make sure all rear windows are clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of all rear windows can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
to-side.The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
windows. Push the defogger button
to turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
145
U.S. EX models and all Canadian models
Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
123
U.S. EX model is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：４４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２８
2010 Insight
Press the ECON button to activate
the ECON mode. ECON ON will be
displayed on the multi-information
display and the ECON mode
indicator will illuminate in the
instrument panel. Press the ECON
button again to turn it off. ECON
OFF will appear on the multi-
information display.
The ECON button turns the ECON
mode on and off. The ECON mode
helps you improve your fuel
economy by modifying some vehicle
functions. When the ECON mode is
on:
In addition, when the ECON mode is
on, you may get more Ecological
Drive Assist points (see page ).
The climate control system will
have greater temperature
fluctuations
Engine performance will be
different
Whenyouturnoffandthenrestart
the engine, the ECON mode setting
remains the same as previously set.
304
ECON Button
124
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
ECON BUTTON
ECON MODE INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１２９
2010 Insight
Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
Pull the lever under the steering
column toward you until it stops.
Push the lever forward fully to
lock the steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Make sure the lever is positioned
securely at the bottom of the
steeringcolumnasshown.
1.
3.
4.
2.
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
125
To adjust
To lock
LEVER
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４２：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３０
2010 Insight
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Two ignition keys come with your
vehicle. You should keep one of
them in a safe place, away from the
vehicle, as a spare.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this number if you ever have to
get a lost key replaced. Use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
Keys and Locks
126
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
IGNITION KEYS
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３１
2010 Insight
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you lose your key and you cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
127
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３２
2010 Insight
−−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in Park.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
If you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position and open the driver’s door,
you will see a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION
SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display and hear a reminder beeper.
If you turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) position with the
driver’s door closed, you will see an
‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display to inform you of the key
position.
LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)
Ignition Switch
128
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３３
2010 Insight
−− Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III)ON (II)
Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
129
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３４
2010 Insight
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
seetheredindicatoronthelocktab
above the inner door handle.
You can customize the door lock/
unlock settings (see page ).
To lock all doors and the hatch, push
the front of the master door lock
switch on either front door, pull the
locktabrearwardonthedriver’s
door, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors
and the hatch. Pushing forward the
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks
only that door.
All doors and the hatch can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door. To unlock
only the driver’s door, insert the key,
turn it clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors and the hatch
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
106
Door Locks
130
Lock
Unlock
LOCK TAB
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To unlock
To lock
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：３２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３５
2010 Insight
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
locktabrearwardorpushthefront
of the master switch, then close the
door.
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (U.S.)/15 km/h
(Canada) or more, all the doors and
the hatch lock automatically.
When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With any door or the hatch
open and the key in the ignition
switch, locking with master door
lock switch is disabled. If the driver’s
door is closed, the lock tab on the
driver’s door is not disabled. Pulling
the driver’s lock tab rearward will
lock all doors or the hatch. If you try
to lock an open driver’s door by
pulling the lock tab rearward, the
driver’s door lock tab pops out and
unlocks the driver’s door.
Default setting
Lockout Prevention
Childproof Door Locks
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
131
Unlock
Lock
LEVER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：３８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３６
2010 Insight
−
−
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the hatch. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sounds to
verify that the doors are locked and
the security system has set. You
cannot lock the doors if any door or
the hatch is not fully closed or if the
key is in the ignition switch.
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door (or all the
doors and the hatch depending on
the door lock setting). Push it twice
to unlock the remaining doors and
the hatch. Some exterior lights will
flash twice when you push the
button the first time.
If you do not open any door or the
hatch within 30 seconds, the doors
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
The ceiling light and the door
activated spotlights come on when
you press the UNLOCK button if the
lights are in the door activated
position. If you do not open any door
or the hatch within 30 seconds (or
whatever setting of the interior light
dimming time is set to), the light(s)
will fade out. If you relock the doors
and the hatch with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the light(s) will go off
immediately.
To change the lock/unlock setting
and the relock timer setting, refer to
the customized settings on page .
The keyless lock acknowledgment
beep and flashing of the lights can
be deactivated (see page ).
106
112
LOCK
UNLOCK
Remote Transmitter
132
LED LOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：４５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３７
2010 Insight
−
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
133
０８／１２／２７ １１：４３：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３８
2010 Insight
＋
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by carefully prying on the edge
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it in the keypad.
1.
2.
3. 4.
Remote Transmitter
134
NOTE:
SCREW
BATTERY
COIN
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：０１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１３９
2010 Insight
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.5.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
135
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４０
2010 Insight
The hatch will lock or unlock when
you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with the key, the remote transmitter,
the master door lock switch, or the
locktabonthedriver’sdoor.
To unlock the hatch, turn the key
clockwise twice, push the rear of the
master door lock switch, or push
UNLOCK twice on the remote
transmitter.
To open the hatch, pull and lift up
the release. To close the hatch, use
thehandletolowerit,thenpress
down on the back edge.
Keep the hatch closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
hatch and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.56
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Hatch
136
INNER HANDLE
RELEASE
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４１
2010 Insight
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the hatch, unlock it manually.
Placeaclothonthetopsideofthe
cover, then use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the hatch.
Push the release lever to the lower
right as shown, and push the hatch
to open it.
If you need to unlock the hatch
manually, it means there is a
problem with the hatch. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Unlocking the Hatch
Hatch
Instruments and Controls
137
Unlock
COVER
RELEASE LEVER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４２
2010 Insight
−
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
14 15
Driver’s Seat Height AdjustmentFrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
138
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４３
2010 Insight
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
16
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
Head Restraints
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Seats
Instruments and Controls
139
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE
BUTTON
Front Position
CUSHION
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４４
2010 Insight
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear seat, the head restraint should
be adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.
The Seat-back must be folded
forward (see page ) to get ceiling
clearance for removal of the head
restraints.
142
For Rear Seat Head Restraints
Removing the Head Restraint
Seats
140
LEGS SEAT-BACK
SEAT-BACK
LEGS
RELEASE
BUTTON
Rear Outer Position
CUSHION
Rear Center Position
CUSHION
RELEASE
BUTTON
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４５
2010 Insight
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
Active Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
141
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４６
2010 Insight
The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more cargo room.
Each side folds down separately, so
you can still carry one or two
passengers in the rear seat.
Lower the rear head restraints to
their lowest positions. If you fold
down the right side seat-back, also
adjust the rear center head
restraint to its lowest position.
Unlock the seat-back by pulling up
the release lever on the outer side
of each rear seat-back.
Fold the seat-back forward.
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back,
and make sure there are no items on
the floor before folding down the
seats.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position. Pull
on the seat-back to make sure it is
latched. If the seat-back is not
latched fully, the seat belt will not
work properly and you will see the
redindicatorbehindtherelease
lever as shown.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs.
1.
2.
3.
Folding the Rear Seats Down
Seats
142
RED INDICATOR
LEVER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４４：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４７
2010 Insight
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
The lid of the console compartment
canbeusedasanarmrest.
295
EX models only
Armrest
Carrying Cargo
Seats
Instruments and Controls
143
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４８
2010 Insight
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
144
SELECTOR
SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH
TAB
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１４９
2010 Insight
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the rear window defogger
button. The indicator in the button
comesonasareminder.Pressthe
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
This heated mirror function has a
timer (see page ).123
On U.S. EX models and all Canadian
models
Power Mirror Heaters
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
145
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５０
2010 Insight
−
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switchdownandholdit.Releasethe
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
AUTO
Power Windows
146
DRIVER’S
WINDOW
SWITCH
FRONT
PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５１
2010 Insight
−
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
The driver’s window auto
reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.
If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
The windows and the main switch
feature will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
The indicators inside the window
switches come on when the light
control switch is in either or
position with the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position
(driver’s window switch only on LX).
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switchwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out.
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
147
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５２
2010 Insight
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
64
Parking Brake
148
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is put into gear with the
parking brake on.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５３
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
149
COAT HOOK
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
FRONT DOOR
POCKET
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
BEVERAGE HOLDERSCENTER CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
CARGO AREA COVER
REAR DOOR BEVERAGE
HOLDER
CENTER TRAY
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
AUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
UNDER FLOOR STORAGES
EX model is shown.
CARGO AREA
:
If equipped
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５４
2010 Insight
You can use the cargo area cover to
conceal your parcels and protect
them from direct sunlight.
To extend the cargo area cover, pull
out the cover from the housing by
pulling the handle on the cover’s
leading edge, then clip the mounting
rods in the slots at both sides of the
hatch opening.
To retract the cover, slip the rods
out of the hooks and guide the cover
so it rolls back fully into its housing.
Do not store parcels on the cargo
area cover. The cover may break if
weight is placed on it.
On Canadian EX model only
Cargo Area Cover
Interior Convenience Items
150
HANDLE
MOUNTING ROD
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：４３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５５
2010 Insight
The cargo area cover housing unit
can be removed to give you more
cargo space.
Release each side of the housing unit
by pushing one end of the unit
toward the other end and lifting it
upward.
To reinstall the cargo area cover
housing unit, place one end of the
unit in the holder on the side panel,
then push it into the side panel
slightly and insert the other end into
its holder.
Make sure the housing unit is
securely placed so it will not come
loose while you are driving.
You can store the cargo area cover
under the cargo area floor.
Open the cargo floor lid.
Open the cargo area cover holder
lids located on both sides of the
cargo area floor.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Storing the Cargo Area Cover
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
151
HOUSING UNIT
Push
LID
CARGO AREA
COVER
LID
０８／１２／２７ １１：４５：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５６
2010 Insight
Store the cover in its holders as
shown in the illustration above.
Reinstall the cargo floor lid.
To open the cargo floor, fold the
cargo floor forward.
To use the storage compartment
locatedontheleftsideofthecargo
area floor, hold the strap and raise
the lid.
Close the lid by pressing until it
latches.
3.
4.
Under Floor Storages Floor Storage Compartments
Interior Convenience Items
152
STRAP
LID
CARGO FLOOR
STORAGES
CARGO AREA
COVER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：００ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５７
2010 Insight
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Your vehicle has an accessory power
socket in the front console panel.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the front and rear door pocket
beverage holders when you open or
closethedoors.Useonlyresealable
containers in the door pockets.
CONTINUED
Beverage Holders Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
153
FRONT REAR
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
LX model only
BEVERAGE HOLDERS LX model is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：０８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５８
2010 Insight
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects from getting into the
socket.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push.
On EX models only
On EX models only
Console Compartment Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
154
LEVER
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１５９
2010 Insight
There is a tray in the front of the
center console. You can also take the
partition out to extend the tray.
When you use the front beverage
holders, you need to put the partition
back to the original position on the
center console.
To open the center pocket, push on
the knob. To close it, push the lid up
until it latches.
Center Tray Center Pockets
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
155
PARTITION
KNOB
Push
LID
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：２３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６０
2010 Insight
Tousethevanitymirrorontheback
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Touseacoathook,slideitout
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is pulled up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
On U.S. EX models and Canadian
models
Vanity MirrorSun VisorsCoat Hook
Interior Convenience Items
156
COAT HOOK
EX model is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６１
2010 Insight
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch: ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
keyorremotetransmitter.
Open any door.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
.
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after about 15
minutes.
105
CONTINUED
Ceiling Light Spotlights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
157
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
EX model with navigation system
Push
Push
SPOTLIGHTS
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６２
2010 Insight
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
...............Climate Control System . 160
Playing the FM/AM Radio
(Models without navigation
..................................system) . 166
Playing a Disc (Models without
...................navigation system) . 173
Disc Player Error Messages
(Models without navigation
..................................system) . 180
PlayinganiPod
(Models without
...................navigation system) . 181
iPod
Error Messages (Models
.....without navigation system) . 187
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device (Models without
...............navigation system) . 188
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages (Models without
...............navigation system) . 197
Playing the AM/FM Radio
(Models with navigation
..................................system) . 198
Playing a Disc (Models with
...................navigation system) . 204
Disc Player Error Messages
(Models with navigation
..................................system) . 214
Playing a PC card (Models with
...............navigation system) . 215
...PC Card Player Malfunction . 228
PlayinganiPod
(Models with
...................navigation system) . 229
iPod
Error Messages (Models
...........with navigation system) . 236
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device (Models with
...............navigation system) . 237
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages (Models with
...............navigation system) . 245
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 246
..................Protecting Your Discs . 248
................Remote Audio Controls . 251
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 252
.................Radio Theft Protection . 253
..........................Setting the Clock . 254
............................Security System . 255
...............................Cruise Control . 256
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 259
Features
Features
159
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６４
2010 Insight
Climate Control System
160
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
U.S. EX models and all Canadian models
FRESH AIR BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
MODE CONTROL BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BAR
０８／１２／２７ １１：４６：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
Press the AUTO button. You will
see AUTO in the display.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
2.
1.
Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control
Climate Control System
Temperature Control
Features
161
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６６
2010 Insight
▲
▼
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
When you adjust a fan control, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
If you press the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times. Press the side of the bar to
increase the fan speed and airflow.
Press the side of the bar to
decrease them.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation
Fan Control
Climate Control System
162
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６７
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
Select recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
When the fresh air indicator is on,
air is brought in from the outside of
the vehicle.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
123
On U.S. EX models and all Canadian
models
Climate Control System
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button Rear Window Def ogger Button
Fresh Air Button
Features
163
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６８
2010 Insight
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows, set as follows:Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
For faster defogging, manually set
the fan speed to high.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Climate Control System
Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button
164
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１６９
2010 Insight
To regulate the interior temperature
and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Climate Control System
Sunlight, Temperature, and
Humidity Sensors
Features
165
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７０
2010 Insight
−−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume
by turning the VOL/SELECT knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the FM/AM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the SEEK button to
tune to a desired frequency. Press
the button to tune to a higher
frequency, and the button to
tune to a lower frequency.
You can also operate the tune
function by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To turn it off, press
the VOL/SELECT knob or
button, or button.
The system will return to the normal
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting the tune mode.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the or side
of the SEEK button until you hear a
beep, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
CONTINUED
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
To Select a Station
TUNE SEEK
SCAN
Features
167
０８／１２／２７ １１：４７：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７２
2010 Insight
−−
−
If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
246
To turn off auto select,
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
AUTO SELECTPreset
168
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７３
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
Theprogramservicenamedisplay
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS)
Program Service (PS) Name Display
Features
169
PROGRAM SERVICE
NAME DISPLAY ON
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７４
2010 Insight
With the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press
or button to display
and select an RDS category. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows;
ALL PTY: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion.
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press or button to
select an RDS category. The display
shows the selected RDS category
name for about 10 seconds. You can
use the search or scan function to
find radio stations in the selected
RDS category. If you do nothing
while the RDS category name is
displayed, the selected category is
canceled.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
170
RDS CATEGORY
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７５
2010 Insight
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
This function searches a frequency
for a strong signal from the
frequency that carry the selected
RDS category information. This can
helpyoutofindastationinyour
favorite category. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK button. You will see the
selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
RDS Program SCANRDS Program Search
Features
171
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７６
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
Press the sound ( ) button to
select an appropriate setting: bass,
treble, fader, balance, and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Turn the VOL/
SELECT knob to adjust the setting.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
Adjusts the volume level
basedonthevehiclespeed.
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob
to adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
121
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
BAS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
SVC Audio System Lighting
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
172
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７７
2010 Insight
You operate the in-dash disc player
with the same controls used for the
radio. To select the disc player, press
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The folder or track
numbers are shown in the display.
You can also select the displayed
information with the TITLE button
(see page ). The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. The numbers
of the folder and track playing are
showninthedisplayonthedisc
player. A disc can support more than
99 folders, and each folder can hold
more than 255 playable files. A disc
canholdupto999filesintotal.
When there are more than 99 folders
in a disc, the audio display only
shows two digits.
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing the CD
button.
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
in this unit.
A disc compressed in AAC format
cannot be played in this audio
system.
176
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
174
NOTE:
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／１２／２７ １１：４８：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１７９
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Number of layers
(including ROOT): Over 8 layers
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
showninthedisplay.Whenplayinga
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Number of layers
(including ROOT): Over 8 layers
248
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
To Load a Disc
Features
175
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８０
2010 Insight
＞
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator on
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 31 characters of text data.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
Text Data Display Function
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
176
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：１７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８１
2010 Insight
−IfyoupressandholdtheTITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 15 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the TITLE button.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
In MP3/WMA mode, use the
or button to select
folders in the disc, and use the SEEK
button to change files.
Each time you
press and release the side, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (files in
MP3/WMA mode). Press and
release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe ,orthe
button.
You can also operate the track
selection by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
and you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.
Turn the knob to switch the track
number. Press the VOL/SELECT
knob or button to set your
selection. To turn it off, press the
button.
You can use the SEEK button while
a disc is playing to change tracks
(files in MP3/WMA mode).
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SEEK/SKIP
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
Features
177
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８２
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−−To
select a different folder, press the
or button. Press the
buttontoskiptothenext
folder, and the button to skip
to the previous folder.
You can also operate the folder and
file selection by using the VOL/
SELECT knob. Press the VOL/
SELECT knob and you will see SEL
in the display, Turn the knob to
switch the folder number and press
the knob to set your selection. To
turn it off, press the button
repeatedly.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3/WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button to
turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc in random order.
In MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
folders are played in random order.
To activate random mode, press the
RDM button repeatedly until you see
RDM in the display. Press and hold
the RDM button to turn it off.
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files in the current folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
activate folder random play, press
the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
pressing and holding the RDM
button.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
in the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3/WMA.
To activate folder repeat mode, press
the RPT button repeatedly until you
see F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder.PressandholdtheRPT
button to turn it off.
In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
FOLDER-RANDOMFOLDER-REPEAT
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
178
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８３
2010 Insight
−
−
This feature,
when activated, samples the first file
in each folder on the disc in the
order they are recorded. To activate
the folder scan feature, press the
SCAN button repeatedly. You will
see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display. The
system will then play the first file in
the main folders for about 10
seconds. When it plays a file that you
want to continue listening to, press
and hold the SCAN button. When
the system samples the first file of
all folders, F-SCAN is canceled, and
the system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
Press the FM/AM button to switch
to the radio while a disc is playing.
To play the disc, press the CD button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
( ) button or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track/file in
the disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
248
In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER-SCAN
To Stop Playing a Disc
Protecting Discs
SCAN
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
Features
179
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８４
2010 Insight
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause SolutionError
Message
249
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
FOCUS Error
TOC Error
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 249). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information, see page 249.
Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
180
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
CHECK DISC
０８／１２／２７ １１：４９：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８５
2010 Insight
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
DonotkeeptheiPodinthe
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
UseonlycompatibleiPodswiththe
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
The system will only play songs
stored on the iPod with iTunes.
This audio system can play the audio
files on the iPod
with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
Software
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Model
iPod Classic
5 Gen.
(2005 or later)
iPod Classic
(2007 or later)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2
generation
iPod nano 3
generation
iPod touch
iPhone
th
nd
rd
EX model
To Play an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
182
NOTE:
０９／０１／０７ １６：０１：０１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８７
2010 Insight
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
1. 2.
3.
www.apple.com/
ipod.
CONTINUED
Connecting an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Features
183
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
０８／１２／２７ １１：５０：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８８
2010 Insight
−
＋
−
＞
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
playing to change files.
Each time you press the
(SKIP ) button, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press the (SKIP )
button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SKIP button.
Each time you press the TITLE
button the display mode switches
between the album name, the song
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown.
To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function
SKIP
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
184
０８／１２／２７ １１：５０：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１８９
2010 Insight
−
−
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the VOL/SELECT knob. Push the
VOL/SELECT knob to switch the
display to an iPod menu, then turn
the VOL/SELECT knob to select a
desired list. Press the VOL/SELECT
knob to set your selection.
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the VOL/
SELECT knob to select an item, then
press the VOL/SELECT knob to set
your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.
Pressing the button goes back
to the previous display and pressing
the TITLE button cancels this
setting mode.
You can select any type of repeat and
shufflemodebyusingtheRPT
button or the RDM button.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press the RPT
button again.
This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order. To activate
the shuffle all feature, press the
RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
the display. To turn it off, press and
hold the RDM button.
CONTINUED
To Select Repeat or Shuff le Mode:
REPEAT
SHUFFLE ALL
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Features
185
Press the VOL/
SELECT knob.
０８／１２／２７ １１：５０：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９０
2010 Insight
−
＊
＊
This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. To activate the
shuffle album feature, press the
RDM button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RDM button.
Each time you press the RDM
button, the mode changes from
shuffle all play to shuffle album play,
then to normal play.
To play the radio when an iPod is
playing, press the FM/AM button. If
a disc is in the audio unit, press the
CD button to play the disc.
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the display shows ‘‘USB
NO DATA.’’
If you see an error message in the
display, see page .
:
187
SHUFFLE ALBUM To Stop Playing Your iPod
iPod Error Messages
Disconnecting an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
186
０８／１２／２７ １１：５０：４３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９１
2010 Insight
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
findthesolutioninthecharttothe
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
CauseError
Message
Solution
USB ROM Error
Abnormal power source
No files in iPod
Use of unsupported
device
Use of unsupported iPod
Recognition failure of
iPod
There is problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. Disconnect the device.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 182 for the specification
information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system dose not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
Features
187
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
UNSUPPORTED
VER.
CONNECT
RETRY
０８／１２／２７ １１：５０：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９２
2010 Insight
＊
＊
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
displaysometextdata.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher. Some digital audio players
maybecompatibleaswell.
Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
This audio system can operate the
audio files on a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
USB flash memory device, connect it
to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
AUX button.
:
CONTINUED
EX model
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Features
189
NOTE:
０９／０１／０７ １６：０１：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９４
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
Bitrate:
8 320 kbps
Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Bitrate:
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
Maximum layers: 8
Partition: Top partition only
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps
(MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
190
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：１７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
showninthedisplay.
Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB connector
correctly and securely.
1. 2.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Features
191
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９６
2010 Insight
−
＋
−
−
＞
Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
change files.
Each time you press the
(SKIP ) button, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press the (SKIP )
button, to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SKIP button.
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display mode shows you
in sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown.
To
select a different folder, press the
button or button.
Pressthe buttontoskipto
the next folder, and press the
buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function
SKIP
FOLDER SELECTION
192
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９７
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
You can also select a folder or file by
using the VOL/SELECT knob. Push
the VOL/SELECT knob to switch
the display to the folder or file list,
then turn the VOL/SELECT knob to
select a folder or file. Press the
VOL/SELECT knob to set your
selection.
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
RPT button, RDM button, or SCAN
button.
Pressing the button goes back
to the previous display and pressing
the TITLE button cancels this
setting mode.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Select a File f rom Folder and File
Lists
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
Features
193
Press the VOL/
SELECT knob.
Folder Selection
Track Selection
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９８
2010 Insight
−−−This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RPT button.
This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the folder repeat feature,
press the RPT button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RPT button.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
This feature plays all
the files in random order. To activate
the track random feature, press the
RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
the display. To turn it off, press and
hold the RDM button.
REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT RANDOM
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
194
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０１９９
2010 Insight
−−−
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
This feature
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
the first file in each folder. Press and
hold the SCAN button to get out of
the folder scan mode and play the
last file sampled.
This feature samples all
files in the selected folder in the
order they are stored. To activate
the scan feature, press the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file in the folder.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan mode and play
the last file sampled.
This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order. To activate
the folder random feature, press the
RDM button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RDM button.
Each time you press the RDM
button, the mode changes from track
random, play to folder random play,
then to normal play.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
FOLDER SCANSCANFOLDER RANDOM
Features
195
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２００
2010 Insight
If you see an error message in the
display, see page .
To play the radio when a USB flash
memory device is playing, press the
FM/AM button. If a disc is in the
audio unit, press the CD button to
play the disc.
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
197
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
196
０８／１２／２７ １１：５１：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０１
2010 Insight
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Error
Message
Cause Solution
USB ROM Error
Abnormal power source
Use of unsupported files
No files in USB flash
memory device
Use of unsupported USB
flash memory device
There is problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
emptyortherearenoMP3,WMA,orAACfiles
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 190 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
Features
197
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
UNPLAYABLE
FILE
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０２
2010 Insight
−
▲▼
▼
▲
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower half of the screen.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, or AM). On the FM
band, STEREO will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction on AM is not
available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
Navigation System Manual for
complete details.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System To Select a Station
TUNE
To Play the AM/FM Radio
Features
199
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０４
2010 Insight
−
▲▼
−
−The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
200
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０５
2010 Insight
− If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then touch the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashes in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
touch the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplay.
246
To turn off Auto Select,
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound
Features
201
SOUND ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０６
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound. To adjust
the left/right balance, touch the L or
Ricon.
The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.
You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
enter the joystick.
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
either or on the treble or
bass adjustment bar. The adjustment
bar on the lower right display shows
you the current setting.
BASS
FADER
BALANCE
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation)
TREBLE
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
202
SPEAKER SETTING
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０７
2010 Insight
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the control panel (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
121
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Audio System Lighting
Screen Mode
Features
203
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２０８
2010 Insight
You operate the in-dash disc player
with the same controls used for the
radio.
This audio system can also play CD-
RsandCD-RWscompressedinMP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 255 folders and play up
to 999 tracks. If the disc has a
complex structure, it takes a while to
readthediscbeforethesystem
begins to play it.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen to by pressing and
holding the CD/AUX button.
Video CDs and DVD discs will not
work in this unit.
A disc compressed in AAC format
cannot be played in this audio
system.
CONTINUED
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
(In-dash single player)
Features
205
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／１２／２７ １１：５２：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１０
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
If an MP3 or WMA file is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FILE ERROR, and then
skips to the next file.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
206
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１１
2010 Insight
The in-dash disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc slot appears.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded screen as a tray. If
you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
CONTINUED
To Load a Disc
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Features
207
DISC SLOT
CLOSE BUTTON
OPEN BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１２
2010 Insight
−
−
Press the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the in-dash disc player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD/AUX button. The status bar
appears on the bottom of the screen.
On the navigation screen, you can
see the audio information whenever
you touch the AUDIO INFO or
TRACK LIST icons on the lower half
of the screen.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.
You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press ENT
on the top of the joystick to select
the icon.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or (preset 3).
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
FF/REW
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
208
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１３
2010 Insight
−−−
▲
▼
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You
will see FOLDER REPEAT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE bar also turns off folder
repeat.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
CONTINUED
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
FOLDER REPEAT
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)FOLDER SELECTION
Features
209
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１４
2010 Insight
−−
−
This
feature plays the tracks/files within
a disc in random order. To activate
track random, press and release the
RDM button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
random, press and hold the RDM
button. You will see FOLDER
RANDOM in the display. The
system then selects and plays files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
the RDM button again, or if you
select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press the SCAN button to get
out of scan mode and play the last
track/file sampled.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/f older) FOLDER RANDOM
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
210
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１５
2010 Insight
−
CONTINUED
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.
This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
andholdtheSCANbuttonfor2
seconds. You will see ‘‘FOLDER
SCAN’’ in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal play.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track List
FOLDER SCAN
Features
211
TRACK/FILE ICON
FOLDER NUMBER
RETURN ICON
FOLDER ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１６
2010 Insight
▲▼
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
on the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If
a PC card is in the audio unit, touch
theCARDicontoplaythePCcard.
Press the CD/AUX button again or
touch the CD icon to switch back to
the in-dash disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a Disc
212
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１７
2010 Insight
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .
To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page ). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD/AUX button.
248
207
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Removing a Disc
Protecting Discs
Features
213
０８／１２／２７ １１：５３：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１８
2010 Insight
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
SolutionCauseError
Message
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.Makesurethediscisnotscratchedor
damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. If
the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Disc Format Error
High Temperature
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
214
CHECK DISC
MECH ERROR
CHECK DISC
HEAT ERROR
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：００ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２１９
2010 Insight
＋
−
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Features
215
OPEN BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
JOYSTICK
TUNE BAR
PLAY MODE
ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CD/AUX BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
PC CARD ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２０
2010 Insight
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the in-dash disc player. To load
or play a card, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 255 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.
Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
SD memory card
Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
To Play a PC Card
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
216
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２１
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1),
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1),
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Features
217
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２２
2010 Insight
The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.
Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Press the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Loading a PC Card
218
PC CARD SLOT
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２３
2010 Insight
Artistmodeplaystracksin
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Therearethreeplaymodes:Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
Foldermodeplaystracksinthe
order they were added to the card.
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.
If play mode information was not
included in the tracks/files when
they were added to the card, it will
not be displayed on the screen.
CONTINUED
To select a play mode
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Features
219
MODE INDICATOR
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON
MODE INDICATOR
MODE INDICATOR
FOLDER MODE
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２４
2010 Insight
To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press ENT.
After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
220
PLAY MODE ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：４３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２５
2010 Insight
−
−
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shownonthebottomofthescreen.
To go back to the previous screen,
presstheCANCELbuttononthe
rightsideofthescreen.Toexitthe
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
If you select ‘‘Play a new track list,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the new track list.
Iconsonthescreencanalsobe
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press ENT on the top of the joystick
to select the icon.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
FF/REW
Features
221
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２６
2010 Insight
−
▲
▼
−
−−
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a file, press the RPT button (preset
1). You will see ‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’
in the display. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off.
This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
andholdtheRPTbuttonagainto
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar also turns
off the repeat feature.
This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate random
play, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder)
222
０８／１２／２７ １１：５４：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２７
2010 Insight
−
−−
The SCAN function
samples all the files on the PC card
in the order they are recorded. To
activate the scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
seeTRACKSCANinthedisplay.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file on the PC card. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, push and hold the
RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.
You will see ‘‘FOLDER RANDOM,
ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM
RANDOM’’ in the display.
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘FOLDER
SCAN, ARTIST SCAN or ALBUM
SCAN’’ in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
CONTINUED
SCANFOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Features
223
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２８
2010 Insight
▲▼
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display. To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.
Using a Track List
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
224
RETURN ICON
FOLDER ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
ARTIST NAME
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２２９
2010 Insight
In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.
When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.
You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.
CONTINUED
Song Search Function
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Features
225
RETURN ICON
ALBUM NAME
Folder mode is shown.
SONG SEARCH ICON
TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
ARTIST ICON
ALBUM ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３０
2010 Insight
▲▼
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCELbuttononthecontrolpanel,
the display returns to the mode
menu without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, touch
the Delete icon. To select more
characters, touch the More icon.
The other character list will be
shown.
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the or
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing ENT.
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
226
DELETE ICON
LIST ICON
FILE LIST
MORE ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３１
2010 Insight
Searching for a Song by Artist Name Searching for a Song by Album Name
Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If
a disc is in the audio unit, press the
CD/AUX button or touch the CD
icon to play the disc. Touch the
CARD icon to switch back to the PC
card player.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
CONTINUED
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a PC Card
Features
227
ARTIST LIST
ALBUM LIST
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３２
2010 Insight
To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
). Press the eject button ( )
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.
207
Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)
Removing a PC Card
PC Card Player Malf unction
228
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３３
2010 Insight
This audio system can play the audio
files on the iPod
with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the CD/AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
The system will only play songs
stored on the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
DonotkeeptheiPodinthe
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
UseonlycompatibleiPodswiththe
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
Software
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Model
iPod Classic
5 Gen.
(2005 or later)
iPod Classic
(2007 or later)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2
generation
iPod nano 3
generation
iPod touch
iPhone
th
nd
rd
To Play an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
230
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：５５：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３５
2010 Insight
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed on the screen. It also
shows the artist, album and track
(file) names on the screen.
1. 2.
3.
www.apple.com/
ipod.
CONTINUED
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Connecting an iPod
Features
231
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３６
2010 Insight
−
＋
−
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs. Press the
AUDIO button to display the screen,
then touch the iPod MENU icon.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press ENT.
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
playing to change files.
Each time you press the
SKIP button (Preset 6), the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press the
SKIP button (Preset 5), to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current file. Press it again to skip to
the beginning of the previous file.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the
artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Select a File f rom iPod MenuTo Change or Select Files
SKIP
232
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３７
2010 Insight
▲▼
PresstheAUDIObuttontogoback
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. The current folder is
highlighted in blue.
CONTINUED
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track List
Features
233
RETURN ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３８
2010 Insight
−−
You can select any type of repeat and
randommodebyusingtheRPT
button or RDM button.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button (Preset 1). You will see
‘‘REPEAT’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press the RPT button (Preset 1)
again.
This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. To activate the
track random feature, press the
RDM button (Preset 2). You will see
‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press the RDM button
(Preset 2).
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
REPEAT TRACK RANDOM
234
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２３９
2010 Insight
−＊
＊
This feature
plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. To activate the album random
feature, press and hold the RDM
button (Preset 2). You will see
‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RDM button (Preset 2).
You can also select another list from
theiPodmenuwhilekeepingthe
random function.
Available operating functions varies
on models or versions. Some
functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
Press the CD/AUX button again or
touch the AUX icon to switch back to
the iPod.
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
the ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in
the iPod display before you
disconnect it. Make sure to follow
the iPod’s instructions on how to
disconnect the dock connector from
the USB adapter cable.
The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the navigation screen
shows ‘‘NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
If you see an error message on the
screen, see page .
To play the radio when an iPod is
playing, press the FM/AM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If
a disc is in the audio unit, press the
CD/AUX button or touch the CD
icon to play the disc. If a PC card is
in the audio unit, press the CD/AUX
button or touch the CARD icon to
play a PC card.
:
236
ALBUM RANDOM To Stop Playing Your iPod
iPod Error Messages
Disconnecting an iPod
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Features
235
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：３４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４０
2010 Insight
If you see an error message on the
screen while playing an iPod, find
thesolutioninthecharttotheright.
If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected.
There is no music information.
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
236
UNSUPPORTED
NO SONG
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４１
2010 Insight
＊
＊
This audio system can operate the
audio files on a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
USB flash memory device, connect it
to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
CD/AUX button.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher. Some digital audio players
maybecompatibleaswell.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
displaysometextdata.
:
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
238
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １１：５６：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４３
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps
(MPEG2)
Maximum layers: 8
Partition:
Top partition only
Bitrate:
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
Maximum layers: 8
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
Partition:
Top partition only
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
Bitrate:
8 320 kbps
Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
Maximum layers: 8
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
Partition:
Top partition only
Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
239
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４４
2010 Insight
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB connector
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected and the USB mode is
selected on the audio system, the
WMAorMP3indicatorisshownon
the navigation screen. It also shows
the folder and file numbers, and the
elapsed time on the screen.
1. 2.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
240
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４５
2010 Insight
−
＋
−
−
▲
▼
▲▼
CONTINUED
Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
change files.
Each time you press the
SKIP button (Preset 6), the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press the
SKIP button (Preset 5), to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current file. Press it again to skip to
the beginning of the previous file.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE FOLDER bar.
Press the side to skip to the next
folder, and press the side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. The current folder is
highlighted in blue.
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Files Using a Track List
SKIP
FOLDER SELECTION
Features
241
TRACK LIST ICON
FOLDER ICON
RETURN ICON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４６
2010 Insight
−−
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
RPT button or RDM button, or
SCAN button.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the track repeat feature, press the
RPT button (Preset 1). You will see
‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press the RPT button
(Preset 1).
This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the folder repeat feature,
press and hold the RPT button
(Preset 1). You will see ‘‘FOLDER
REPEAT’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RPT button
(Preset 1).
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
TRACK REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT
242
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：２９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４７
2010 Insight
−−−This feature
plays all the files in random order.
To activate the track random feature,
press the RDM button (Preset 2).
You will see ‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in
the display. To turn it off, press the
RDM button (Preset 2).
This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order. To activate
the folder random feature, press and
hold the RDM button (Preset 2). You
will see ‘‘FOLDER RANDOM’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RDM button (Preset 2).
This feature
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, press
the SCAN button. You will see
‘‘TRACK SCAN’’ in the display. You
will also see the file number blinking.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file in the folder. Press the
SCAN button to get out of the scan
mode. The system plays the last file
sampled.
CONTINUED
TRACK RANDOM FOLDER RANDOM TRACK SCAN
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Features
243
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４８
2010 Insight
−
To play the radio when a USB flash
memory device is playing, press the
FM/AM button or touch the FM1,
FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in the
audio unit, press the CD/AUX
button or touch the CD icon to play
thedisc.IfaPCcardisintheaudio
unit, Press the CD/AUX button or
touch the CARD icon to play a PC
card.
Press the CD/AUX button again or
touch the AUX icon to switch back to
the USB flash memory device.
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the navigation screen shows ‘‘NO
DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
If you see an error message on the
screen, see page .
This feature
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and hold the SCAN button.
You will see ‘‘FOLDER SCAN’’ in the
display. You will also see the folder
number blinking. You will get a 10
second sampling of the first file in
each folder. Press the SCAN button
to get out of the scan mode. The
system plays the last file sampled.
245
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
FOLDER SCAN
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
244
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２４９
2010 Insight
If you see an error message on the
screen while playing a USB flash
memory device, find the solution in
the chart to the right. If you cannot
clear the error message, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
Error Message Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is connected.
There is no music information.
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
Features
245
UNPLAYABLE FILE
UNSUPPORTED
NO SONG
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５０
2010 Insight
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
246
０８／１２／２７ １１：５７：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５１
2010 Insight
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
247
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：００ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５２
2010 Insight
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
248
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５３
2010 Insight
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
249
Sealed
Warped
Burrs
Chipped/
Cracked
With Label/
Sticker
With Plastic
Ring
Using Printer
Label Kit
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５４
2010 Insight
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
4. 5.
Protecting Your Discs
250
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５５
2010 Insight
▲▼
＋
−
＋−
＋
−
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
discoraPCcard(ifadiscoraPC
card is loaded), or an audio unit
connected to the auxiliary input jack
or the USB adapter cable.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.IfyoupressandholdtheCH
button ( ) or ( ), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
Ifyouareplayingadisc,iPodorUSB
flash memory device, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
format) each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track/file.
Press it twice to return to the
previous track/file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
CONTINUED
On vehicles with navigation system
Remote Audio Controls
Features
251
CH BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５６
2010 Insight
＋
−
＋
−
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top ( ) of the
CH button until you hear a beep to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top ( ) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous file.
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX (on vehicles with navigation
system) or AUX (on vehicles without
navigation system) button to select it.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
252
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：４５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５７
2010 Insight
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
code. On vehicles with navigation
system, touch the icon to enter the
code number, then touch the Done
icon to set the code. The code is on
the radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code using the preset
buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Radio Theft Protection
Features
253
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５８
2010 Insight
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
For example:
Press and hold the FM/AM
(CLOCK) button until the displayed
time begins to blink, then release the
button. Change the hours by
pressing the 1 (H) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
2 (M) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
PresstheFM/AM(CLOCK)button
again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press the FM/
AM (CLOCK) button until you hear
a beep, then press the 3 (R) button
tosettheclockbacktotheprevious
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, the clock sets forward
to the beginning of the next hour.
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Setting the Clock
254
FM/AM (CLOCK)
BUTTON
CLOCK
2 (M) BUTTON
1 (H) BUTTON 3 (R) BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５８：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２５９
2010 Insight
The alarm will also be activated if a
passenger inside the locked vehicle
turns the ignition switch on.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the hatch, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause the
alarm to activate. It will also activate
if the radio is removed from the
dashboard or the wiring is cut.
The security system will not set if
the hood, hatch, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and hatch open
indicator on the instrument panel
and multi-information display (see
page ) to see if the doors and
hatch are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
The security system sets
automatically 15 seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and the hatch.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors and the hatch from
the outside with the key, driver’s
lock tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for 2 minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
activated system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or use the
remote transmitter.
12
Security System
Features
255
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６０
2010 Insight
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
transmission speed may change to
maintain the set vehicle speed.
1.
2.
3.
U.S. EX models and all Canadian models
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
256
CANCEL
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６１
2010 Insight
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
257
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：２２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６２
2010 Insight
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Tap the brake pedal.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously-set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Tapping either of the paddle shifters
shifts the speed up or down, but does
not cancel the cruise control. For
more information on driving with
paddle shifters, see page .316
EX models only
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
258
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６３
2010 Insight
−
−
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
HFL Buttons
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Using HFL
HFL Talk button
HFL Back button
Features
259
HFL BACK BUTTON
NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HFL TALK
BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６４
2010 Insight
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-7890’’ or ‘‘Dial
Peter.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
When HFL is in use, navigation
voice commands cannot be
recognized.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
Airorwindnoisefromthe
dashboard and side vents and
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Voice Control Tips
260
MICROPHONE
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
The Bluetooth icon will also
appear on the audio display when a
phone is linked.
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Help Features Information Display
Features
261
ROAM STATUS
HFL
MODE
PHONE DIALING
BATTERY LEVEL
STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６６
2010 Insight
A notification that there is an
incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.
When there is an incoming call, or
HFL is in use, ‘‘HFL’’ will appear at
the bottom of the map screen.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
262
HFL MESSAGE
０８／１２／２７ １１：５９：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６７
2010 Insight
＃＃＃＃
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
How to Use HFL
Features
263
‘‘Phone Setup’’
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’
‘‘Pair’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’
‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘List’’
‘‘Status’’
‘‘Next Phone’’
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 267)
Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 267)
Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 267)
Pair a phone to the system (See page 266)
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 268)
Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 268)
Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 268)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 269)
‘‘123-555- ’’ Enter desired phone number (See page 269)
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６８
2010 Insight
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
264
‘‘Redial’’
‘‘Transfer’’
‘‘Mute’’
‘‘Send’’
‘‘Phonebook’’
‘‘Store’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Receive
Contact’’
‘‘List’’
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 272)
Redial the last number called (See page 270)
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 272)
Send numbers or names during a call (See page 272)
Store a phonebook entry (See page 273)
Edit the name of an existing phonebook entry (See page 273)
Delete a phonebook entry (See page 274)
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 274)
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 274)
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２６９
2010 Insight
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
265
‘‘Change Language’’
‘‘Hands Free Help’’
‘‘System
Set up’’
‘‘Tutorial’’
‘‘Clear’’
‘‘Auto Transfer’’
‘‘Call Notification’’
‘‘Security’’
‘‘Change Passcode’’
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 261)
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 261)
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 279)
Change your security passcode (See page 280)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 281)
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 280)
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 280)
Change language from English to French (See page 282)
: Canadian models
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７０
2010 Insight
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
andreturntoidle.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘
’’ and say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
foryourphone.
When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phone Setup
Phone
setup Pair
Phone pairing tips
To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
266
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７１
2010 Insight
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
HFLwillreadoutallthepaired
phone’s names.
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3. 3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Phone setup
Edit
Phone setup
Delete
List
Phone setup
To hear the names of all paired
phones:
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
267
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７２
2010 Insight
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘ ’’
and follow the HFL prompts.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:
To change the pairing code setting:
Phone setup
Status
Phone setup
Phone setup
Next phone
Set pairing code
Random
Fixed
268
０８／１２／２７ １２：００：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７３
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.
The maximum range between your
phoneandvehicleis30feet(10
meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make the
call.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenamestoredintheHFL
phonebook that you want to call.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Making a Call
Call Dial
Call Dial
Call Dial
To make a call using a phone
number:
Tomakeacallusinganameinthe
HFL phonebook:
Features
269
０８／１２／２７ １２：０１：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７４
2010 Insight
Select ‘‘
.’’
Press the INFO button, then select
‘‘ .’’
Select a phonebook you want to
choose a phone number from.
If the phonebook you select is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page for
more information.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3.
277
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Search Imported
Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Redial
To redial the last number called by
HFL:
To make a call from an imported
phonebook:
270
０８／１２／２７ １２：０１：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７５
2010 Insight
Select the name. All the phone
numbers stored for that name will
be listed.
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
If you choose ‘‘
,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.
Select the phone number, and
HFL begins dialing.
4.
5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Receiving a Call
List
Store in
HandsFreeLink
Call Waiting
Features
271
List ICON
０８／１２／２７ １２：０１：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７６
2010 Insight
＃
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘ ’’ again.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
Say ‘‘ .’’1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Transferring a Call
Transfer
Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names During
aCall
Mute
Mute
Send
To send a name or number during a
call:
272
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １２：０１：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７７
2010 Insight
Youcanstoreupto50nameswith
their associated numbers on HFL.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenameentryyouwanttoedit.
When asked, say the new number
for that name.
Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To store a phonebook entry:
To edit the number stored in a name:
Phonebook
Store
Enter
NOTE:
Phonebook
Edit
Phonebook
Features
273
０８／１２／２７ １２：０１：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７８
2010 Insight
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.
If you hear a name you want to call,
immediatelypresstheHFLTalk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘ ’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Phonebook
Delete
Phonebook
List
Call
Receive contact
Phonebook
Discard
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
274
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２７９
2010 Insight
(available on some phones)
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
If you select
from the navigation system
menu, you will see four HFL options.
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
The entire phonebook data of the
cell phone that is linked to HFL can
be imported to the navigation system.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and HFL will begin
importing the phonebook. Select
‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.
Once a phonebook has been
imported, you can search the phone
numbers by the person’s name.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook from the list.
For a list of cell phones that are
compatible with this feature:
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Cellular Phonebook Options
Cellular Phonebook
Options
Import Cellular
Phonebook
OK
Search Cellular
Phonebook
Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:
Features
275
IMPORTED PHONEBOOK
IMPORTED DATE
PIN ICON
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８０
2010 Insight
Select a person from the list. Up to
threecategoryiconsaredisplayedin
the left side of the list:
Select the person’s number you want
to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
name. If a name has more than three
category icons, ‘‘…’’ is displayed.
If the phonebook is PIN-protected,
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN
on the following screen.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
List
276
Preference
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
List ICON
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８１
2010 Insight
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
After making a selection, the
following screen will appear.
Select‘‘ ,’’then‘‘ ’’tocomplete
the deletion.
You can add, change, or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
You can delete any imported
phonebook.
Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.
If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will
have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Delete Imported
Phonebook
Yes OK
PIN Number
Delete Imported Phonebook:
To add a PIN:
Features
277
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：３８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８２
2010 Insight
Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select
‘‘ ’’ after you enter
the current PIN.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select the phonebook you want. The
display will change as shown above.
Enter the current PIN for this
phonebook.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:
PIN number
Do not use PIN
278
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：４５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８３
2010 Insight
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
toresetitforyou,oryouwillhaveto
clear the entire system (see page
).
1.
2.
3.
4.
281
CONTINUED
System Setup
System setup
Security
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:
Features
279
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １２：０２：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８４
2010 Insight
＊
＊
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ You
can also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
The default setting is a ring tone.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
:
System setup
Auto transfer
System setup
Change passcode
System setup
Call notification
Ring tone Prompt
Off
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To change your security pass code: To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification :
To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:
280
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８５
2010 Insight
This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘
.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts.
Say the language you want to
change to in that language.
1.
2.
3.
2.
1.
Canadian models only
System setup
Clear
System
clear
Quick Language Selection
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To clear the system:
To quickly change the language:
Features
281
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８６
2010 Insight
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.
1.
2.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Canadian models only
Bluetooth Wireless TechnologyChange Language
Change language
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To change the system language
between English and French:
282
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：２４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８７
2010 Insight
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 284
.................Fuel Recommendation . 284
.........Service Station Procedures . 285
....................................Refueling . 285
.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 286
OpeningandClosingthe
.......................................Hood . 287
...................................Oil Check . 288
.............Engine Coolant Check . 289
...............................Fuel Economy . 290
...Accessories and Modifications . 293
.............................Carrying Cargo . 295
Before Driving
Before Driving
283
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８８
2010 Insight
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, contact your dealer or
visit Owner Link at
www.hondacars.
com.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
284
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：３８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２８９
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Removethefuelfillcapslowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Push on the right edge of the fuel
fill door and release it so that it
pops open. Pull it out to open it
fully.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Before Driving
285
Push
HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER
FUEL FILL DOOR
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９０
2010 Insight
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multi-
information display. If the system
still detects an evaporative system
leak after retightening the cap, the
malfunction indicator lamp may
come on (see page ).
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
thefuelfillcap.Toscrolltoanother
message, press the INFO button.
The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
5.
6.
403
Service Station Procedures
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
286
０８／１２／２７ １２：０３：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９１
2010 Insight
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle to the left to
release the hood. Lift up the hood.
1. 2.
403
CONTINUED
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
287
LATCH
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Pull
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：０１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９２
2010 Insight
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
2.
3.
1.
3.
Oil Check
Service Station Procedures
288
DIPSTICK
SUPPORT ROD CLIP
GRIP
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９３
2010 Insight
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
4.
348
353
345
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Oil
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
289
MAX
MIN
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
RESERVE TANK
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：１７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９４
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles in the
U.S. or 20,000 km in Canada per year
multiplied by the cost per gallon
(based on EPA fuel cost data)
divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
City MPG
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
Fuel Economy
290
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG
Highway MPG
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９５
2010 Insight
−
−−
−
−−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multi-
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
Use the ECON ON mode as much
as possible.
345
CONTINUED
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Maintain proper tire inf lation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean Avoid excessive idling
348
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Eff iciently
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
291
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：３８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９６
2010 Insight
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Calculating Fuel Economy
Plan and combine trips
Fuel Economy
292
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
Lper
100 km
Liter
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９７
2010 Insight
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any accessory:Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system (if
equipped).
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
405
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
293
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０８／１２／２７ １２：０４：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９８
2010 Insight
＊
＊
Some examples are:
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) .
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
: U.S. models
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
294
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０２９９
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Seat-back pockets
Door pockets
Cargo area
Coin pocket
Console compartment
Center tray
Floor storage compartment
Under floor storages
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
2:
1:
LX models only
EX models only
1
2
1
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
295
CENTER TRAY
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COIN POCKET
1:
LX models only2:
EX models only
SEAT-BACK
POCKETS
CARGO AREA
DOOR POCKETS
GLOVE BOX
FLOOR STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
EX model is shown.
UNDER FLOOR
STORAGES
1
2
1
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３００
2010 Insight
−×
−
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Ifyourvehiclewillbetowinga
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(4)Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
296
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０１
2010 Insight
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
297
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：３１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０２
2010 Insight
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the operation of the seats,
or the operation of the sensors
under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the hatch, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Trytosecuretheitemswithrope
or cord so they will not shift while
you are driving.
Do not place items on the cargo
area cover (if equipped), or stack
objects higher than the top of the
back seat. They could block your
view and be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden
stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
hatch, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Ifyoufoldtherearseatsdown,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. Keep all cargo below
the bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Refer to page for folding rear
seats.
56
142
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo
298
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０３
2010 Insight
Do not spill any liquids over the air
intake or insert any foreign objects
in it. This may damage the IMA
battery and the power control unit.
The air intake for the IMA battery
and electronics is located on the rear
left pillar. Do not block this air intake,
it may cause the IMA battery and the
power control unit to overheat,
causing the IMA to shut down. It will
start working again after it cools.
Air Intake
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
299
AIR INTAKE
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：４５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０４
2010 Insight
300
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０５
2010 Insight
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmissions (CVT). It
also includes important information
on parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA
) system, and the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
........................Preparing to Drive . 302
.......................Starting the Engine . 303
Ecological Drive Assist System
............................(Eco Assist . 304
.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 311
Driving with the Paddle
.......................................Shifters . 316
................................Auto Idle Stop . 321
...........................................Parking . 323
.............................Braking System . 324
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 326
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 328
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
),
aka Electronic Stability
........Control (ESC), System . 332
...........................Towing a Trailer . 334
Driving
Driving
301
TM
)
０８／１２／２７ １２：０５：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０６
2010 Insight
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
Check that the hood and hatch are
fully closed.
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages , and
).
1.
2.
3.
8.
7.
6.
9.4.
5.
375
61 72
75
17
138
144
125
10.
Preparing to Drive
302
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：００ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０７
2010 Insight
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
In cold weather, the conventional
starter is used instead of the IMA
system starter. This is normal.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting the Engine
Starting in Cold Weather
Driving
303
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .127
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０８
2010 Insight
The multi-information display (see
page ).
Your vehicle’s fuel economy may
improve more with the ECON mode
on (see page ).
The driver feedback information is
shownintwolocations:
The ambient meter, located
behind the speedometer (see page
).
The system monitors your driving
style, and can display how it impacts
your vehicle’s fuel economy. You can
then make adjustments to your
driving style to maximize fuel
economy. (For additional
information on fuel economy, see
page .)
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco
Assist ) is a driver feedback system
designed to help you develop and
maintain a fuel efficient driving style.
72
290
75
124
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
304
ECO-drive Result
ECON BUTTON
ECO-guide feedback
ECON MODE INDICATOR
Ambient Meter
TM
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３０９
2010 Insight
TheEcoDriveBarontheEcoguide
feedback display appears on the
multi-information display while you
drive.
During acceleration, the bar
extends to the right of the center
line.
If the bar extends into the
Inefficient Driving Zones, your
current driving style is not
conducive to good fuel economy.
If the bar stays within the Efficient
Driving Zones, your current
driving style is conducive to good
fuel economy.
During deceleration, the bar
extends to the left of the center
line.
It is recommended to drive in the D
position for better fuel efficiency.
CONTINUED
Driving Style Eco Drive Bar
Slow, steady
acceleration -
maximizes fuel
economy
Slow deceleration -
maximizes fuel
economy
Moderate
acceleration
Moderate
deceleration
Aggressive/
Inconsistent
acceleration - lowers
fuel economy
Aggressive
deceleration - lowers
fuel economy
Eco Guide Feedback
Eco Drive Bar Examples
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
Driving
305
ECO
DRIVE
BAR
Acceleration
Monitor
Inefficient Driving Zone
Center Position
Deceleration
Monitor
Inefficient Braking Zone
Efficient Zones
ECO ELEMENTS
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：２９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１０
2010 Insight
The Ambient Meter (the light
behind the speedometer) changes
color to show the effects of your
driving style. This feature can be
turned off (see page ).
Fuel Economy
Meter Background Color
103
Ambient Meter
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
306
AMBIENT METER
U.S. model is shown.
(Background Color)
Green
Blue Green
Blue
High
Low
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１１
2010 Insight
−
CONTINUED
Eco assist scoring is displayed on the
multi-information display in the
following ways:
A point system is used so you can
monitor your driving style and the
impact on fuel economy. Points are:
Accumulatedwhenyourdriving
style is fuel efficient
Deducted when your style is not
fuel efficient
Your current
trip is represented on the Eco Guide
screen, starting without any leaves
on the plants. Leaves then
accumulate during the current trip,
as long as you maintain an economic
driving style.
Eco Assist Scoring
Real Time Score
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
Driving
307
FIRST STAGE
THIRD STAGE
PLANT ICON
SECOND STAGE
Real Time Score
With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１２
2010 Insight
−
−
The score
from your just completed trip is
represented on the Eco Score screen
by the ‘‘plant’’ icons.
Cumulative, or
lifetime trips, which build up over
time, represented by a bar graph at
the bottom of the Eco Score display.
Each time you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position, the
Eco Score displays for a few seconds
to show your current stage and
lifetime points.
Drive Cycle Score
Lifetime Points
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
308
STAGE-UP
RECOGNITION
ICON
When turning off the ignition switch
TROPHY
DRIVE CYCLE
SCORE
LIFETIME
POINTS
STAGE-DOWN RECOGNITION ICON
Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０６：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１３
2010 Insight
There are three Eco stages, with five
plants per stage. As you accumulate
a specified number of leaves, you
advance from one stage to the next.
The plant grows leaves from left to
right, or loses them from right to left.
A trophy icon appears once you have
reached the maximum third stage
score.
Idle duration
ECON button usage
Vehicle speed
Braking and accelerating
The scoring system for points is
based on:
Real time scores must accumulate over time to result in a stage change. In order to build lifetime
points and advance to the next stage, you need to keep your efficient driving style every time you
make a trip. It can take several months to move from one stage to the next. Individual results will
vary.
A total of two leaves can be put on each plant icon.
A total of four leaves can be added to each plant icon.
A circular shaped icon, which represents a blossom, can be
added on top of each plant icon with four leaves.
An icon appears once you have reached the maximum score for
each stage and are moving up to the next stage. These icons
appear briefly when the ignition switch is turned off.
Oncethe3rdstagemaximumscoreisreached,thesystem
continues to monitor your driving. If you maintain a fuel
efficient driving style, your score remains at the highest stage.
If you drive less efficiently, points will be deducted and you
maydrop(stagedown)tothepreviousstage.
Stages/Displays and Icons Definition
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
Driving
309
First Stage
Second Stage
Third Stage
Maximum Score Icons
Second
Stage
First
Stage
Third
Stage
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１４
2010 Insight
＊
＊
The following procedure clears all
leaves and your lifetime points. This
procedure must be followed exactly.
As you progress to a higher level, the
system monitors your driving style
more strictly. As a result, you must
further refine your driving style to
continue to move up to the next level.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Confirm that the ECON
mode is OFF. If it is OFF, proceed to
step 1. Do run the engine.
Thefollowingaresomeofthe
conditions that may effect your
score:
Extremely high or low ambient
temperature
Inconsistent acceleration use, such
as pumping the pedal repeatedly
within a short period of time
Frequent use of the climate
control system
Short distance trips
IftheECONmodeison,pressand
releasetheECONbuttontoturnit
off. You also need to turn the ignition
switch off.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position again. Do run the
engine.
Press and release the brake pedal
at least two times. The ambient
meter color changes from blue to
green .
Complete the following steps within
30 seconds:
The ambient meter color
changes only if the multi-
information display’s meter
color change setting is on. (See
page .)
Press and release the ECON
button two times (ECON mode
comes on, then goes off). The
ambient meter color goes off, and
the accumulated data is cleared.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
:
1.
2.
3.
103
Reset the System
not
not
Ecological Drive Assist System (Eco Assist )
310
TM
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１５
2010 Insight
Honda’s Continuously Variable
Transmission’s unique design
provides a smooth, constant flow of
power. It is electronically controlled
for more precise operation and
better fuel economy.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Driving
311
LX models Except LX models
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１６
2010 Insight
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwhen
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
StoL
LtoS
StoD
DtoN
DtoS
NtoD
RtoN
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
DtoS
StoD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
LX models Except LX models
Shifting
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
312
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１７
2010 Insight
−
−−
−
−
CONTINUED
Selecting Second
shifts the transmission into a lower
range of ratios for better
acceleration and increased engine
braking. Use Second when you are
going down a steep hill.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically adjusts to
keep the engine at the best speed for
driving conditions. To help the
engine warm up faster, the
transmission will select ratios that
allow the engine to run at higher
speedswhenitiscold.
Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
frontoftheshiftlevertoshiftfrom
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestop,andthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Always shift to the
Park position if you need to leave the
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from Neutral to
another position.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
315
LX models
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Second (S)
Drive (D)Reverse (R)
Neutral (N)
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Driving
313
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１８
2010 Insight
−− When the vehicle reaches the
maximum speed in any shift position,
you may feel the engine cut in and
out. This is caused by a limiter (112
mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
speed to below the maximum.
To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. The S position is
similar to D, except the range of
ratios are different for better
acceleration and increased engine
braking.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
canalsousethepaddleshiftersto
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page .
To shift to Low, press
the release button on the front of the
shift lever. Use Low to get more
power when climbing, and for
maximum engine braking when
going down steep hills.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD,S
or L, the transmission will
automatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lower
range of ratios by pushing the
accelerator pedal to the floor.
316
Except LX modelsLX models
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Second (S)Low (L)
Speed Limiter
314
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３１９
2010 Insight
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Insert the
key back into the ignition switch,
press the brake pedal, and restart
the engine.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Set the parking brake.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Driving
315
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SLOT
RELEASE BUTTON
COVER
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２０
2010 Insight
＋
−
＋
−
To shift up or down, use the
(right) or (left) paddle shifter on
either side of the steering wheel.
Pull the (right) paddle shifter to
upshift. Pull (left) to downshift.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the shift indicator shows you the
selected speed number.
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
WhenyouaredrivingintheD
position, pulling either paddle shifter
switches from the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT) to the
D-paddle shift mode. You can shift
the transmission up or down through
seven-stages manually with the
paddle shifters.
When the transmission returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT), the displayed shift indicator
disappears.
Except LX models
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the
D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
316
SHIFT INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １２：０７：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２１
2010 Insight
＋
−
CONTINUED
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
the normal driving, the system
judges that you are driving at a
constant cruising speed without
using the paddle shifters. Under
these conditions, D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission automatically returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT).
When the transmission returns to
ordinary automatic transmission
(CVT), the displayed shift indicator
disappears.
To cancel the D-paddle shift mode
manually, pull and hold the side
paddle shifter until the shift indicator
goes out.
Downshifting with the (left)
paddle shifter allows you to increase
the engine braking when going down
steep or long hills, and provides
more power when climbing uphills.
You can upshift the transmission
manually to reduce the rpm.
The transmission remains in the
selected speed if you do not
accelerate.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Driving
317
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２２
2010 Insight
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
speed up or down. If you want to
shift up or down more than two
speeds, pull the paddle shifter twice,
pause, and then pull it again.
The automatic transmission (CVT)
will not allow you to change shift if:
The transmission downshifts to first
speed and returns to ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT) when
the vehicle comes to a complete stop
and the vehicle speed is about 6 mph
(10 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT).
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed.
If you try to do this, the shift
indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times,
then return to a higher speed.
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed.
You press both paddle shifters at
thesametime.
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pressed.
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
318
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２３
2010 Insight
＋
−
−
With the shift lever in the S position,
you can select the 7-Speed Manual
shift mode to shift speeds; much like
a manual transmission using the
paddle shifters, but without a clutch
pedal.
To enter the 7-speed manual shift
mode, press the release button on
thesideoftheshiftlever,movethe
lever to the S position, then pull
either paddle shifter. To cancel the
7-speed manual shift mode and
return to the ordinary automatic
transmission (CVT), move the shift
lever from the S position. When
moving the shift lever, be careful not
to operate incorrectly. While you are
driving in the 7-speed manual shift
mode, the transmission will not
automatically return to the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT).
When you move the shift lever from
the ‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull
either paddle shifter, the shift
indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the
selected speed number.
To upshift, pull the (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the
(left) paddle shifter.
If you keep depressing the
accelerator pedal without pressing
the paddle shifter, the speed will be
automatically shifted up just before
the tachometer’s red zone.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
speed when the vehicle speed
reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
Downshifting with the (left)
paddle shifter allows you to increase
the engine braking when going down
steep or long hills, and provides
more power when climbing uphills.
You can upshift the transmission
manually to reduce the rpm.
CONTINUED
Except LX models
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S
position (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode)
Driving
319
SHIFT INDICATOR
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２４
2010 Insight
−
→
→
→
→
→
→
The automatic transmission (CVT)
will not allow you to change shift if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed.
If you try to do this, the shift
indicator will flash the number of
the lower speed several times,
then return to a higher speed.
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed.
You press both paddle shifters at
thesametime.
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pressed.
Drive in the highest speed number
that lets the engine run and
accelerate smoothly. This will give
you effective emissions control. The
following shift points are
recommended:
To shift to Low,
press and hold both paddle shifters
simultaneously until you see L in the
shift indicator. Use Low to get more
power when climbing, and for
maximum engine braking when
going down steep hills.
Shift up
12
23
34
45
56
67
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
50 mph (81 km/h)
55 mph (89 km/h)
Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Recommended Shift Points L (Low) mode
320
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２５
2010 Insight
The engine automatically stops
when:
The vehicle comes to a stop with the
shift lever in the D position and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will not stop
automatically under the following
conditions:
Vehicle speed does not go above 7
mph (11 km/h) after starting the
engine
The engine coolant temperature is
low
The transmission fluid
temperature is low
The vehicle is stopped with the
shift position in R, S, or L
When the vehicle is stopped on an
incline
The climate control is in use and
either or is pressed
The engine may not stop
automatically under the following
conditions:
When the ECON button is on, the
engine is more likely to stop. See
page for the ECON button.
The vehicle is stopped by braking
suddenly
Theclimatecontrolsystemisin
use to dehumidify the moist air
inside the vehicle
The ECON button is off, and there
is a significant difference between
the ambient temperature and the
temperature setting of the climate
control system
The IMA battery temperature is
excessively high or low
The IMA battery charge is low
The engine may also stop when
vehicle speed drops below 7 mph (11
km/h) with the brake pedal pressed.
To help maximize fuel economy,
your vehicle has an Auto Idle Stop
function. Depending on
environmental conditions and vehicle
operation, the engine will shut off
when you come to a stop.
124
Auto Idle Stop
Driving
321
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２６
2010 Insight
The engine automatically restarts
when:
The brake pedal is released
Under the following conditions, the
engine restarts even if the brake
pedal is pressed:
The shift position is changed to R
or L
The accelerator pedal is pressed
The pressure to the brake pedal is
reduced and the vehicle starts
moving while stopped on an incline
The IMA battery charge becomes
low
The engine coolant temperature
becomes low
The pressure on the brake pedal is
repeatedly applied and released
slightly during a stop
The ECON button is off, and the
difference between the ambient
temperature and the temperature
setting of the climate control
system becomes significant
Theclimatecontrolsystemstarts
to dehumidify the interior This indicator blinks when the Auto
Idle Stop system is in operation.
If the driver’s door is opened while
the indicator is blinking, the buzzer
sounds to notify that the Auto Idle
Stop system is in operation.
Auto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
322
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２７
2010 Insight
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Lock the doors.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Turn off the lights.
Make sure the windows are closed.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
323
０８／１２／２７ １２：０８：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２８
2010 Insight
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels are drum. A power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on
thebrakepedal.TheABShelpsyou
retain steering control when braking
very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their
effectiveness. Use the engine to
assist the brakes by taking your foot
off the accelerator and downshifting
to a lower speed.
Braking System
324
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３２９
2010 Insight
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
The following features are also
equipped:
When you release the brake pedal
while the Auto Idle Stop function is
activated, this feature keeps the
braking pressure until the engine
starts, and prevents the vehicle from
dropping back.
This feature helps you apply the
brakes with less force during an
emergency braking situation.
Creep Aid System
Brake-Assist
Braking System Design Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Braking System
Driving
325
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３０
2010 Insight
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page .404
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
326
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：１８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３１
2010 Insight
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
It only helps with steering
control during braking.
404
Important Safety Reminders ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
327
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３２
2010 Insight
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
Youshouldstopandcheckyourtires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator and
message on the multi-information
display go out after inflating the tires
to the specified values, have your
dealer check the system as soon as
possible.
386
U.S. models only
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
328
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３３
2010 Insight
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
youcheckandadjustyourtire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
thetiresmaybecomeoverinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
thetiresareoverinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
intheowner’smanual(seepage
).
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see TPMS System Failure).
375
376
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
Driving
329
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３４
2010 Insight
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page ).
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multi-
information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator will come
on. Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
sparetirepressuretobesureitis
correct.
328
333
387
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
330
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３５
2010 Insight
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
331
０８／１２／２７ １２：０９：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３６
2010 Insight
The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
When VSA is off, the VSA off
indicator comes on as a reminder.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on (see page ),
or the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing
(see page ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if the
VSA system is turned off with the
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
329
328
On U.S. models
EX models only
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Off Indicator
332
NOTE:
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３７
2010 Insight
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
379
VSA and Tire SizesVSA OFF Switch
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
333
VSA OFF
SWITCH
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３３８
2010 Insight
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the multi-information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 336
....................Maintenance Minder . 337
..............................Fluid Locations . 347
........................Adding Engine Oil . 348
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 350
..............................Engine Coolant . 353
....................Windshield Washers . 355
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 356
Continuously Variable
............Transmission (CVT) . 356
....................................Brake Fluid . 357
.............................................Lights . 359
................................Roof Antenna . 369
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 369
.....................................Floor Mats . 369
..................DustandPollenFilter .370
.................................Wiper Blades . 370
...............................................Tires . 375
......Checking the 12 Volt Battery . 381
.............................Vehicle Storage . 383
Maintenance
Maintenance
335
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４０
2010 Insight
435
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or qualified
mechanic.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
336
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：２９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４１
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100% 91%
90% 81%
80% 71%
70% 61%
60% 51%
50% 41%
40% 31%
30% 21%
20% 16%
15% 11%
10% 6%
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life
(%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the multi-information display to show
youwhenyoushouldhaveyour
dealer perform engine oil
replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
To see the current engine oil life
displayed on the multi-information
display, turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, and press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life is displayed.
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
CONTINUED
Engine Oil Lif e Display
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
337
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４２
2010 Insight
▲▼
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) indicating
themainandsubitemsrequiredat
thetimeoftheoilchange.Referto
page for a complete list of the
maintenance main items and sub
items.
Pressing either INFO button ( / )
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page ).
The message appears on the multi-
information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
This message reminds you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life information. Along
with the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message, you
will see the percentage of the
remaining engine oil life and the
maintenance item codes on the
multi-information display.346
70
Maintenance Minder
338
REMAINING ENGINE
OIL LIFE
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE (S)
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE (S)
SUB ITEM (S)
MAIN ITEM (S)
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：４３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４３
2010 Insight
−
▲▼
When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed with. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed as
soon as possible.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘5%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
1 5 percent (see page ).
Pressing either INFO button ( / )
switches the display from the
message to another display. Once
you switch the display, this message
will go off.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page ).70
337
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
339
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４４
2010 Insight
▲▼
−
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0%, the multi-
information display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total distance traveled is less than 10
miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oillifebecame0%.
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .
Pressing either INFO button ( / )
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with ‘‘0%,’’ and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
01percent.
Along with the message, the system
message indicator comes on (see
page ).
342
70
Maintenance Minder
340
０８／１２／２７ １２：１０：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４５
2010 Insight
▲▼
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multi-
information display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .
Pressing either INFO button ( / )
switches the display from the
message to another display. To see
the message again, press either
INFO button repeatedly.
When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life,
the message ‘‘SERVICE,’’ along with
the maintenance item code(s) and
the total negative distance traveled
after the oil life became 0%, will be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
This message is displayed again
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0% message.
342
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
341
CANADAU.S.
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
U.S. CANADA
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４６
2010 Insight
▲▼
All the maintenance items displayed
in the multi-information display are
in code.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If the engine oil life is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
buttononthesteeringwheel
repeatedly.
Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
modewillbeshownonthemulti-
information display.
1.
2.
3.
346
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
342
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO BUTTONS ( / )
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
Models with cruise control
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４７
2010 Insight
▲▼
▲▼
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO ( / ) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
4.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
343
INFO BUTTON
(/)
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
Models without cruise control
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４８
2010 Insight
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Maintenance Minder
344
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：２３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３４９
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
youfillthefueltank.Seepage .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page .
According to state and federal
regulations, Honda will not deny a
claim for emissions warranty
coverage simply because you did not
maintain the vehicle or do not have
maintenance records to show that
you did. However, any part of that
fails because of abuse or lack of
required maintenance will not be
covered by this warranty.
U.S. Vehicles:
289
356
357
375
359
288
CONTINUED
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA
standards.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
345
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：３２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５０
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
346
:
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Independent of the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
NOTE:
:
345
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
Maintenance Minder
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５１
2010 Insight
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour the
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
348
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５３
2010 Insight
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the multi-
information display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient
0W-20 oil is the engine lubricant for
your Insight. This special oil is
formulated to help your engine use
less fuel.
Adding Engine Oil
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Maintenance
349
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
０８／１２／２７ １２：１１：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５４
2010 Insight
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap.
Remove the screws with a Phillips-
head screwdriver, and clips with a
flat-tipped screwdriver, then pull
the under-cover down.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multi-
information display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
1.
2.
3.
Changing the Oil and Filter
350
SCREW
CLIP
SCREWS
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Remove the oil drain bolt and
washer from the bottom of the
engine. Drain the oil into an
appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
7.
8.
4. 5.
6.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
351
WASHER
OIL FILTER
BOLT
3.4 US qt (3.2 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５６
2010 Insight
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
Put the under-cover back in place
and reinstall the holding clips and
screws. Lock the clips securely by
pushing on the center of each clip.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Changing the Oil and Filter
352
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５７
2010 Insight
−−
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to between the
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
353
RESERVE TANK
If you regularly drive your vehicle
under severe conditions in very low
temperature (under 31°F, 35°C), a
higher concentration of coolant should
be used. Consult your Honda dealer
for more information on the proper
coolant.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５８
2010 Insight
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
354
RADIATOR CAP
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３５９
2010 Insight
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
If the washer fluid is low, a
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
On U.S. models
On all Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
355
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６０
2010 Insight
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. There is a HOT
side and a COLD side on the
dipstick. The fluid level should be
between the upper and lower
marks on the HOT side.
Always use Honda CVTF
(Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid).
3.
4.
5.2.
1.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
356
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
HOT
Range
LOWER
MARK
０８／１２／２７ １２：１２：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６１
2010 Insight
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is indicated by a maintenance
message on the multi-information
display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
You will also see the ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display when the brake
fluid level is low.
Replace the brake fluid when this
service is indicated by a maintenance
message on the multi-information
display.
6.
CONTINUED
Brake Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
Maintenance
357
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：０１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６２
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Open the hood.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or another
qualified technician.
To change the bulb on the right
side, remove the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part by pulling it
straight up.
Remove the electrical connector
from the cover by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the cover.
Remove the cover on the back of
the headlight assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
1. 2.
3.
Headlight Aiming
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
High Beam Headlight
Maintenance
359
HOLDING CLIP
CONNECTOR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６４
2010 Insight
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Reinstall the cover over the back
of the headlight assembly and turn
it clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the cover.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
360
BULB
COVER
CONNECTOR
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６５
2010 Insight
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Install the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
Remove the bulb from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Open the hood.
(Right side)
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.
1.
10.
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
Maintenance
361
BULB
CONNECTOR
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６６
2010 Insight
Open the hood.
To change the bulb on the right
side, remove the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part by pulling it
straight up.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Install the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the upper part of the
windshield washer reservoir tank
in the reverse order of removal.
(Right side)
6.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
Lights
Replacing a Front Parking Light
Bulb
362
BULB
HOLDING CLIP
SOCKET
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６７
2010 Insight
Place a cloth on the edge of the
light assembly garnish. Remove
the cover by carefully prying in
the notch on its left edge with a
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Remove the socket from the front
turn signal light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
front turn signal light assembly.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the light assembly in the
reverse order of removal. Make
sure to secure the bolt.
Install the garnish in the original
position securely.
Remove the bolt and pull the front
turn light assembly from the
bumper while taking the tab out
from the holder.
5.
6.
1.
7.
8.
3.
4.
2.
Lights
Replacing the Front Turn Signal
Light Bulb
Maintenance
363
TAB
BOLT
GARNISH
NOTCH
BULB
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６８
2010 Insight
Open the hood.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Install the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
Lights
Replacing a Front Side Marker
Light Bulb
364
BULB
SOCKET
０８／１２／２７ １２：１３：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３６９
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Open the hatch.
Push on the area of the trim as
shown in the illustration above to
detach the upper hooks from the
light assembly.
Pry on the gap between the trim
and light assembly carefully with a
flat-tipped screwdriver to detach
the lower hooks.
Make sure that all hooks are
removed from the light assembly.
Unclip the top half of the trim
fromthebodybypullingitout.
Then unclip the bottom half.
1.
2.
3. 4.
Lights
Replacing the Rear Bulbs
Maintenance
365
HOOKS
TRIM
HOOKS
CLIP
CLIP
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７０
2010 Insight
Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
Pull the rear of the light assembly
out as shown in the illustration
above ( ), then push the
assembly back to the original
position carefully ( ). The front
part of the rear light assembly
raises slightly ( ).
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: back-up light,
turn signal, or side marker.
Pull the whole light assembly
outwards from the body carefully.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.
6.
7.
5. 8.
9.
10.
Lights
366
BOLT
ORIGINAL
POSITION
Front
Front
Left side
BULB
SOCKET
SNAP FASTENERS
Left side
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７１
2010 Insight
Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Reinstall and
tighten the two mounting bolts. To reinstall the trim, set the
bottom edge of the trim in the
original position and push the
bottom half of the trim to clip it
back securely. Then push the
upperhalfofthetrimtosecure
the top clip.
Secure the hooks by pushing on
the areas of the trim as shown in
the illustration above.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15. 16.
Lights
Maintenance
367
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７２
2010 Insight
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
The high-mount brake light should
be replaced by your dealer.
The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
EX models
Lights
Side Turn Signal Lights
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
High-mount Brake Light
368
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７３
2010 Insight
Beforeusinganautomaticcarwash,
remove the radio antenna so it does
not get damaged. Remove the
antenna by unscrewing it. When you
reinstall the antenna, tighten it
securely.
Before entering or parking in areas
with low ceiling height, remove the
antenna.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. To lock each
anchor, turn the knob clockwise.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the
knob counterclockwise to unhook
the floor mat.
CONTINUED
On all Canadian models
Roof Antenna Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts
Roof Antenna, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
369
LOOP
To unlock
Driver’s floor mat is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７４
2010 Insight
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly positioned. If not, the floor
mat will interfere with the seat
operation and make the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multi-
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
theclimatecontrolsystembecomes
less than usual.
Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
370
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７５
2010 Insight
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Put a cloth on the edge of the
lock tab, then push up on the
lock tab carefully with a flat-
tipped screwdriver.
Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.1.
2.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
371
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
WIPER ARM
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：５０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７６
2010 Insight
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Make sure the two rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
3.
4.
5.
Wiper Blades
372
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
０８／１２／２７ １２：１４：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７７
2010 Insight
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed and that its edge is not
bunched up.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
To replace a rear wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypivotingthe
blade assembly upward.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
373
REAR
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：０６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７８
2010 Insight
Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Slide the new blade into the holder.
Make sure it is engaged in the slot
along its full length.
Insert both ends of the blade into
the holder. Make sure they are
secure.
Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
Slide the blade out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
3.
5.
4.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
374
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：１４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３７９
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
328
On U.S. models
On all Canadian models
On U.S. models
Tires Inflation Guidelines
Tires
Maintenance
375
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８０
2010 Insight
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumpsorbulgesinthetreador
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .421
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures Tire Inspection
376
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
175/65R15 84S
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3
kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：３７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８１
2010 Insight
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
421
Tires
Tire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
Tire Maintenance
Maintenance
377
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８２
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
The ABS and VSA system works by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
(VSA) to work inconsistently.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
:
On U.S. models
If equipped
Tires
Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels
378
Front Front
(Front Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(Front Directional
Tires and Wheels)
０８／１２／２７ １２：１５：５６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８３
2010 Insight
＋
CONTINUED
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN
SC1026
420
421
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Maintenance
379
15x51/2J
175/65R15 84S
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８４
2010 Insight
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
If equipped
Tires
Wheels
380
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８５
2010 Insight
−
Check the condition of the 12 volt
battery monthly by looking at the
test indicator window. The label on
the battery explains the test
indicator’s colors.
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It will show less than the
actual level temporarily. It will show
the correct level after you drive for
at least 30 minutes.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
CONTINUED
WARNING:
Wash your hands af ter handling.
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
Maintenance
381
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８６
2010 Insight
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradio,youwill
see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
).
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
254
253
On vehicles with navigation system
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
382
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８７
2010 Insight
Fill the fuel tank.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the 12 volt battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
drive your vehicle every month for
about 30 minutes. This will keep
the IMA battery charged and in
good condition.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and hatch seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and hatch seals.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
383
If this vehicle is unused for over one
month, the service life of the 100V
Nickel-Metal Hydride battery will be
reduced and the battery may be
permanently damaged.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：３６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８８
2010 Insight
384
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３８９
2010 Insight
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 386
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 387
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 394
................................Jump Starting . 396
..............If the Engine Overheats . 398
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 401
12 Volt Battery Charging System
.....................................Indicator . 402
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 403
...............Brake System Indicator . 404
..............................................Fuses . 405
..............................Fuse Locations . 410
......................Emergency Towing . 412
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 413
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
385
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９０
2010 Insight
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
samewheel.Thesparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on
while driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on
again. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
TPMS SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display. This is
normal; the system cannot
monitor the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
On U.S. models
Compact Spare Tire
386
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：５１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９１
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Open the hatch.
Remove the cargo area floor by
carefully pulling the front edge of
the floor straight up.
4.
3.
2.
1.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
387
HOLDER
FLOOR
TAB
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１６：５９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９２
2010 Insight
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Take the box out of the spare tire.
Take the spare tire casing out of
the cargo area.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
Remove the jack compartment
cover by pulling the knob.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
6.
7.
10.5. 8.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
388
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BOX
JACK
KNOB
COVER
SPARE TIRE
CASING
SPARE TIRE
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９３
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Remove the wheel cover by
carefully prying under its edge
with the flat tip of the extension.
11. 13.
14.
12.
On LX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
389
WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
JACKING POINTS
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９４
2010 Insight
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
18.
17.
16.
15.
Changing a Flat Tire
390
BRAKE HUB
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：２３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Remove the carpet from the spare
tire casing and store it in the
casing.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the box in the wheel of the
flat tire.
Remove the center cap (if
equipped) before storing the flat
tire in the cargo area well.
Install the spare tire casing in the
original position in the spare tire
well.
20.
21.
19.
22.
23.
24.
EX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
391
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
BOX
For normal tire
For compact
spare tire
CARPET
SPARE TIRE
CASING
CENTER CAP
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：３２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９６
2010 Insight
Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
(see
page ).
Store the center cap in the cargo
area. Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
Store the tools in the spare tire
casing and the jack in its holder.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
clockwise to lock it in place, and
reinstall the cover.
Place the cargo area floor in its
original position. Close the hatch.
25.
26.
27.
28.
330
U.S. models only
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with TPMS
392
FLOOR
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９７
2010 Insight
Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
Align the valve mark on the wheel
cover to the tire valve on the
wheel, then install the wheel cover.
Make sure the wire support ring is
ontheoutersideofthetirevalve
as shown.
1.
2. 3.
LX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Installing a wheel cover
Taking Care of the Unexpected
393
CLIPS CLIPS WIRE SUPPORT RING
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：４６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９８
2010 Insight
The engine normally starts with the
IMA motor. If the engine does not
start while the IMA battery charge is
normally sufficient, check the
following:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
127
405
303
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Starting the
Engine
394
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：５２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０３９９
2010 Insight
When the IMA battery charge is low,
the starter motor is used to start the
engine. If the engine does not start,
check the following:
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the 12 volt battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the 12 volt battery and terminal
connections (see page ). You
canthentryjumpstartingthe
vehicle from a booster 12 volt
battery (see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
412
381
396
396
412
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Emergency
Towing
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
395
０８／１２／２７ １２：１７：５７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４００
2010 Insight
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
To jump start your vehicle:
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the 12 volt
battery.
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
1.
2.
Jump Starting
396
BOOSTER
BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extremecold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０１
2010 Insight
−＋
＋
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
397
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０２
2010 Insight
If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It will show less than the
actual level temporarily. It will show
the correct level after you drive for
at least 30 minutes.
The high temperature indicator
should be off under most conditions.
If the engine coolant temperature
gets higher than normal, the
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
You will also see a ‘‘WATER TEMP
HOT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the high
temperature indicator blinking or
remaining on. Or you may see steam
or spray coming from under the
hood.
67
If the Engine Overheats
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
398
Driving with the high temperature
indicator on can cause serious damage
to your engine.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：１９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０３
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
check the high temperature
indicator. If the high heat is due to
overloading, the engine should
start to cool down almost
immediately. If it does, wait until
the high temperature indicator
goes off, then continue driving.
If the high temperature indicator
stays on, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the high
temperature indicator goes off
before checking the radiator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
289
412
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
399
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０４
2010 Insight
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the high temperature indicator. If
it begins to blink or comes on
again, the engine needs repair
(see on page
).
8.
9.
10.
11.
412
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency Towing
400
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０５
2010 Insight
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
The engine running generates the oil
pressure. When the Auto Idle Stop is
activated, the engine is stopped, the
oil pressure is dropped, and the low
oil pressure indicator does not come
on.
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
288
348
412
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
401
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０６
2010 Insight
−
−
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the 12
volt battery is not being charged.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
The charging system indicator may
also come on if the Integrated Motor
Assist (IMA) battery charge drops
below a desired level and the engine
starts to recharge the battery.
This indicator may blink after you
start the vehicle in the morning
when the temperature is below 20
°F ( 30°C). It will stop blinking
when the IMA battery warms up.
63
12 Volt Battery Charging System Indicator
402
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０７
2010 Insight
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least
once (see page ). Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page .
286
89
428
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Code Emissions Testing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
403
If you keep driving with the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１８：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０８
2010 Insight
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down and pull to the side of the
road when it is safe. Because of the
long distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If this indicator comes on for any
other reason, have your vehicle
inspected by your dealer. There may
be a malfunction with the electric
brake distribution (EBD) system.
Avoidhardbrakingandhighspeed
driving.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. If you do not release the
parking brake, the indicator will stay
on, and you will see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display.
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
412
357
89
Brake System Indicator
Emergency
Towing
(Red)
404
U.S.
Canada
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：０１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４０９
2010 Insight
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
threefuseboxes.
The interior fuse box is behind the
dashboard on the driver’s side.
The interior fuse box label is
attached on the back side of the
cover. To see the interior fuse box
label, remove the cover by pulling it
toward you while holding the bottom
center part of cover.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
405
INTERIOR
COVER
LABEL
FUSE BOX
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：０８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１０
2010 Insight
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the under-
hood fuse box located on the
battery (see page ).
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box on the 12
volt battery by looking through
thetopatthewireinside.
Replacement of these fuses should
be done by your dealer.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the interior fuse
box.
1. 2.
410 411
406
4.
3.
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
407
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：２２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１２
2010 Insight
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse.Ifitisblown,replacethefuse
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
The fuse puller is in the interior fuse
box.
5.
Fuses
408
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１３
2010 Insight
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock according to the
instructions in the audio system
sectioninthisowner’smanual.
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page ).
6.
253
On vehicles with navigation system
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
409
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１４
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. No. Amps.Circuits ProtectedAmps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
10 A
10 A
10 A
30 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
30 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Back Up
TPMS
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
Back Up Light
SRS
Transmission SOL
OPDS
Not Used
A/C
ABS/VSA
IMA
ACC Socket
Accessory
Daytime Running Light
Rear Wiper
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window
Fuel Pump
Washer
Meter
15 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
Hazard
Stop/Horn
Not Used
LAF
Door Lock Main
Headlight Main
Small Light
Radiator Fan motor
IGPS
Right Headlight Low Beam
IG Coil
Left Headlight Low Beam
Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
ABS/VSA FSR
Selectable Door Lock
IGP
Not Used
Not Used
IMA 1
MG Clutch
STS
1:U.S.models
2:EXmodels
1
2
2
Fuse Locations
410
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：４０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１５
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
No. Circuits Protected
No.
Amps.
Circuits ProtectedAmps.
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
Ignition Coil (EX)
Ignition Coil (IN)
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
15 A
15 A
Hatch Lock
Not Used
Condenser Fan Motor
Left Headlight High Beam
Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
Right Headlight High Beam
DBW
IMA 2
Not Used
Heated Mirror
Front Wiper
Blower Motor
ABS/VSA Motor
Rear Defogger
Rear Defogger
Not Used
IG Main
7.5 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
50 A
1
2
3
100 A
60 A
20 A
Battery, Main, ACG
EPS
Horn, Stop, Hazard
1:
2:
3:
U.S. LX model
U.S. models except LX model and all
Canadian models
EX models
2
3
1
2
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
411
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES
On the battery
Next to the battery
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：４９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１６
2010 Insight
−
−
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Wheel-lift Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Emergency Towing
412
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the front wheels off
the ground.
０８／１２／２７ １２：１９：５８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１７
2010 Insight
To use the towing hook:
Remove the cover from the front
bumper using your fingers, or pry
it off using a cloth and a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page ).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the cargo area.
1.
2.
412
CONTINUED
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
413
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：０７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１８
2010 Insight
Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
3.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
414
WHEEL
NUT
WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：１１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４１９
2010 Insight
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 416
................................Specifications . 418
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 420
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 420
.................................Treadwear . 420
......................................Traction . 420
.............................Temperature . 421
.................................Tire Labeling . 421
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 423
.......................Emissions Controls . 425
.....................The Clean Air Act . 425
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 425
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 425
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 425
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 426
....................PGM-FI System . 426
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 426
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 426
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 426
....................Replacement Parts . 426
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 427
........................Emissions Testing . 428
Technical Information
Technical Inf ormation
415
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：１５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２０
2010 Insight
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Remove the cover
on the engine compartment
bulkhead to view the VIN. Always
close the cover when finished.
Identification Numbers
416
COVER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２１
2010 Insight
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The IMA Motor Number is stamped
on the motor housing.
Identification Numbers
Technical Inf ormation
417
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
IMA MOTOR NUMBER
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：２５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２２
2010 Insight
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
418
Dimensions
Weights
Seating Capacities
Capacities
Engine
172.3 in (4,377 mm)
66.7 in (1,695 mm)
56.2 in (1,427 mm)
100.4 in (2,550 mm)
58.7 in (1,492 mm)
58.1 in (1,475 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
3.4 US qt (3.2
)
3.2 US qt (3.0
)
4.0 US qt (3.8
)
Total
Front
Rear
5
2
3
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.116 US gal (0.44
)
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
5.12 US qt (4.85
)
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid (CVTF)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs DILFR6F11G
10.8 : 1
82 cu-in (1,339 cm
)
2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)
3.0 US qt (2.8
)
5.5 US qt (5.2
)
10.6 US gal (40
)
1.202 US gal (4.55
)
1.332 US gal (5.04
)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
i-VTEC gasoline engine with
Hybrid Electric Motor
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
(NGK)
Change
Total
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
1
2
０８／１２／２７ １２：２０：４１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２３
2010 Insight
−−
−
−
−
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
419
Air Conditioning
Tires
Alignment
Fuses
12 Volt Battery
Lights
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.8 17.6 oz (450 500 g)
SP-10
12 V 60 W
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type
12 V 55 W
Size
Pressure
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Interior
Under-hood
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
175/65R15 84S
3°20’
1°
0°
0.1 in (2.5 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 12 V
12 V
35 AH/20 HR
28 AH/5 HR
12 V 21 W
T135/80D15 99M
12 V 5 W
See page 410 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 411 or the fuse box
cover.
Headlights
Front turn signal lights
Front parking lights
Front side marker lights
Side turn signal lights
(door mirror)
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/taillights
Back-up lights
Rear side marker lights
License plate lights
Spot lights
Ceiling light
Cargo area light
High-mount brake light
Glove box light 12 V 3.4 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
5W
8W
8W
5W
2CP
16 W
12 V 21 W
Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
5W12 V
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
1:
2:
(HB3)
(H11)
(Amber)
LED type
LED type
LED type
EX models
(Amber)
1
1
1
2
2
2
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：０４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２４
2010 Insight
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
420
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：１２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２５
2010 Insight
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
CONTINUED
Temperature Tire Labeling
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
Technical Inf ormation
421
(4) (3) (2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２６
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an
exampleoftiresizewithan
explanation of what each component
means.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Max Press The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
Max Load The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Year
Week
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R
DOT
2202
S
65
15
175
84
EUYU
2KNR
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
422
DOT EUYU 2KNR 2202
175/65R15 84S
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：３５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２７
2010 Insight
−
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
CONTINUED
U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Inf ormation
423
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：４２ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２８
2010 Insight
−
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
424
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：４７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４２９
2010 Insight
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Inf ormation
425
０８／１２／２７ １２：２１：５５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３０
2010 Insight
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
426
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３１
2010 Insight
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Inf ormation
427
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
U.S. model is shown.
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：１３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３２
2010 Insight
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
428
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：２０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３３
2010 Insight
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Inf ormation
429
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：２６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３４
2010 Insight
430
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：２８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３５
2010 Insight
....Customer Service Information . 432
....................Warranty Coverages . 433
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 434
.....................Authorized Manuals . 435
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
431
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３６
2010 Insight
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
416
Customer Service Information
432
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
Visit www.honda.ca for contact
information
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
０９／０１／０８ １４：２１：３０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３７
2010 Insight
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2010 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2010 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
433
０９／０１／１３ ０９：１６：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３８
2010 Insight
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
434
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
０８／１２／２７ １２：２２：５３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４３９
2010 Insight
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
Authorized Manuals
435
Publication
Form Number
61TM800
61TM800EL
61TMA30
31TM8600
31TM8800
31TM8M00
31TM8Q00
HON-R
Form Description
2010 Honda Insight Service Manual
2010 Honda Insight
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2010 Model Series Honda Insight
Body Repair Manual
2010 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual
2010 Honda Insight
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2010 Honda Insight Honda Service History
2010 Honda Insight Technology Reference Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
www. helminc. com
０９／０１／１３ ０９：１６：４５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４０
2010 Insight
436
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：０５ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４１
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
....................................Accessories . 293
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.....................................Position) . 128
.............Accessory Power Socket . 153
................Active Head Restraints . 141
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 348
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 25
...Airbags, Additional Information . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
..........AdvancedAirbagSystem .30
.............................Airbag Service . 36
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 35
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 34
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 33
........................SRS Components . 25
..............Air Conditioning System . 160
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 376
................................Ambient Meter . 72
......................................Antifreeze . 353
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 64, 326
...................................Operation . 326
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 253
Anti-theft Steering Column
............................................Lock . 128
..........................................Armrest . 143
................................Audio System . 166
.......................Auto Door Locking . 107
...................Auto Door Unlocking . 108
................................Auto Idle Stop . 321
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23
.............Automatic Speed Control . 257
.Automatic Transmission (CVT) . 311
..........................Capacity,Fluid .418
...............Checking Fluid Level . 356
Paddle Shifters in the
..............................D Position . 316
Paddle Shifters in the
...............................S Position . 319
.....Recommended Shift Points . 320
.......................................Shifting . 312
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 311
................Shift Lever Positions . 313
....................Shift Lock Release . 315
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 252
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 63, 402
............................Jump Starting . 396
..............................Maintenance . 381
............................Specifications . 419
..............................Before Driving . 283
....................................Belts,Seat .9,21
...........................Beverage Holder . 149
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 259
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 326
.............Break-in, New Linings . 284
....................Bulb Replacement . 365
...........................................Fluid . 357
...................Pad Wear Indicator . 325
.......................................Parking . 148
...........System Indicator . 63, 64, 404
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：１０ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４２
2010 Insight
.............................Braking System . 324
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 284
Brightness Control,
...............................Instruments . 121
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 365
..............................Brake Lights . 365
........Front Side Marker Lights . 364
.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 363
.................................Headlights . 359
..........................Parking Lights . 362
..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 365
............................Specifications . 419
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 359
.........................................Card, PC . 215
.........................Cargo Area Cover . 150
..........................Cargo Area Light . 158
............................Capacities Chart . 418
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
.............................Carrying Cargo . 295
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
..................................Ceiling Light . 157
...............................Center Pocket . 155
...................................Center Tray . 155
........................Certification Label . 416
............................................Chains . 379
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 387
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 350
......................................When to . 337
...Charging System Indicator . 63, 402
............Checklist, Before Driving . 302
.....................................Child Safety . 38
Child Seats
.............LATCH Anchor System . 47
.............................Lower Anchor . 47
............................Tether Anchor . 50
................Childproof Door Locks . 131
.............................Climate Control . 160
.........................Clock, Setting the . 254
........................CO in the Exhaust . 425
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 303
..............................Compact Spare . 386
.................Console Compartment . 154
.............Controls, Instruments and . 59
Coolant
........................................Adding . 353
....................................Checking . 289
.........................Proper Solution . 353
...............Temperature Indicator . 67
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 425
............Cruise Control Operation . 256
.........................Customer Service . 432
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 60
..............Daytime Running Lights . 120
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 434
..............Defogger, Rear Window . 123
..............Defrosting the Windows . 163
....................................Dimensions . 418
.............Dimming the Headlights . 119
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 356
..................................Engine Oil . 288
........................Directional Signals . 118
Disc Brake Pad Wear
...................................Indicators . 325
............................Disc Player . 173, 204
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 352
Index
C
D
II
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：１６ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４３
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Doors
...........Auto Door Locking . 107, 130
.......Auto Door Unlocking . 108, 130
............Childproof Door Locks . 131
............Locking and Unlocking . 130
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 421
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 301
....................................Economy . 290
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 370
.......Eco Guide Feedback Monitor . 73
Ecological Drive Assist System
..........................(ECON Assist) . 304
................................ECON Button . 124
..................................ECON Mode . 124
..............................Economy, Fuel . 290
............Emergencies on the Road . 385
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 396
.....Brake System Indicator . 63, 404
................Changing a Flat Tire . 387
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 63, 402
..................Checking the Fuses . 407
Low Oil Pressure
...........................Indicator . 62, 401
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 403
..................Overheated Engine . 398
.........................Emergency Brake . 148
....................Emergency Flashers . 122
...........Emergency Hatch Opener . 137
......................Emergency Towing . 412
.......................Emissions Controls . 425
........................Emissions Testing . 428
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 353
Coolant Temperature
...................................Indicator . 67
.........................If It Won’t Start . 394
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 403
.........................Oil Life Display . 337
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 401
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 348
...............................Overheating . 398
............................Specifications . 418
............................Speed Limiter . 314
.......................................Starting . 303
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 425
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
...................................Fan, Interior . 162
.........................................Features . 159
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 285
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 370
...............................................Oil . 350
...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 122
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 387
.....................................Floor Mats . 369
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 356
..........................................Brake . 357
..................Windshield Washer . 355
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 246
........................Four-way Flashers . 122
............................Front Airbags . 10, 25
Index
F
E
INDEX
III
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：２１ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４４
2010 Insight
.................................................Fuel . 284
......................Fill Door and Cap . 285
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 284
...............................Oxygenated . 284
........................Reserve Indicator . 70
........................Tank, Filling the . 285
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 407
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 359
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 259
..............................................Hatch . 136
......................................Opening . 136
............................Open Indicator . 68
............Hazard Warning Flashers . 122
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 359
.........Daytime Running Lights . 120
..................High Beam Indicator . 69
......................Reminder Beeper . 119
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 359
.................................Turning on . 119
............................Head Restraints . 139
.............................Heated Mirrors . 145
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 303
...............High-Low Beam Switch . 118
.......................Hood, Opening the . 287
....................................................Horn . 4
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 290
.........................................Gasoline . 284
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 70
...........................................Gauge . 73
................Octane Requirement . 284
........................Tank, Filling the . 285
................Gas Station Procedures . 285
Gauges
.............................Charge/Assist . 74
...............................................Fuel . 73
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 311
..........Automatic Transmission . 311
......................................Glove Box . 154
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 416
Ignition
............................................Keys . 126
.........................................Switch . 128
............Timing Control System . 426
IMA System Power Flow
........................................Monitor . 84
......................Immobilizer System . 127
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 62
...Indicators, Messages (MID) . 62, 89
...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 64
..............................Auto Idle Stop . 66
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 63, 404
.............................Cruise Control . 69
.................................Cruise Main . 69
................Door/Hatch Open . 12, 68
DRL (Daytime Running
....................................Lights) . 120
.EPS (Electric Power Steering) . 68
................................ECON Mode . 71
...................................High Beam . 69
....High Temperature (Coolant) . 67
......................IMA Battery Level . 85
.................................IMA System . 66
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63
Index
I
H
G
IV
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：２７ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４５
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
Indicators, Messages (MID)
.....................................Lights On . 69
......................................Low Fuel . 70
................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 401
.....Low Temperature (Coolant) . 67
Low Tire Pressure/
...............................TPMS . 66, 328
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 403
..........................Security System . 70
...........................Side Airbag Off . 65
.................................Seat Belt . 21, 62
.........................................SRS . 34, 64
.........................System Message . 70
.................................TPMS . 328, 329
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 69
12 Volt Battery Charging
..............................System . 63, 402
........................................VSA Off . 65
.................................VSA System . 65
...............................Infant Restraint . 43
Infant Seats
......LATCH Anchorage System . 47
...........................Lower Anchors . 47
...........................Tether Anchors . 51
.....Inflation, Recommended Tire . 376
...................................Pressures . 376
........................Information Display . 72
.................................Inside Mirror . 144
.............................Inspection, Tire . 376
............................Instrument Panel . 61
................Instrument Panel Lights . 62
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 121
...............................Interior Lights . 157
........................................Introduction . i
.......................................iPod
. 181, 229
.......................Label, Certification . 416
...............Lane Change, Signaling . 119
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 22
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 359
.......................................Indicator . 62
.......................................Parking . 118
................................Turn Signal . 118
....................................Load Limits . 296
....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 128
Locks
.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 128
............................Fuel Fill Door . 286
..........................................Hatch . 136
...............................Power Door . 130
........................Low Coolant Level . 289
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 70
................................Lower Anchors . 47
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 401
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 418
................................................Keys . 127
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 389
.......................................Jack, Tire . 388
................................Jump Starting . 396
Index
J
K
L
INDEX
V
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：３３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４６
2010 Insight
..................................Maintenance . 335
......Main Items and Sub Items . 342
........................................Minder . 337
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 345
..........................................Safety . 336
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 403
.........................Meters, Gauges . 61, 72
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 284
...........................................Mirrors . 144
....................................Adjusting . 144
........................................Heated . 145
...MP3/WMA . 175, 190, 206, 217, 239
...................Neutral Gear Position . 313
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 284
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 416
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 284
.........................................Odometer . 73
Oil
........................Change, How to . 350
......................Change, When to . 337
......................Checking Engine . 288
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 401
.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 349
.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 128
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 425
............................Outside Mirrors . 144
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 80
....................Overheating, Engine . 398
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 345
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 284
..............................Paddle Shifters . 316
............Panel Brightness Control . 121
........................Park Gear Position . 313
...........................................Parking . 323
...............................Parking Brake . 148
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 63, 404
...............................Parking Lights . 118
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 323
.............................PGM-FI System . 426
..................Playing the Radio . 166, 198
........................Playing a Disc . 173, 204
...................PlayinganiPod
. 181, 229
.........................Playing a PC Card . 215
Playing a USB Flash Memory
................................Device . 188, 237
...................................Pollen Filter . 370
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 38
.......................Protecting Infants . 43
.......Protecting Larger Children . 52
.........Protecting Small Children . 44
...................Radiator Overheating . 398
.Radio/Disc/Sound System . 166, 198
.................Radio Theft Protection . 253
...................Readiness Codes . 403, 428
Rear Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 365
Index
O
P
R
M
N
VI
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：３９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４７
2010 Insight
CONTINUED
..................................Safety Belts . 9, 21
............Safety Defects, Reporting . 434
.................................Safety Features . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
.......................................Seat Belts . 9
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................................Seat Belts . 9, 21
...............Additional Information . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 23
.....................................Cleaning . 369
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 22
........................Maintenance . 24, 369
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 21, 62
...................System Components . 21
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
.....................................Belt . 17, 22
......................Seats, Adjusting the . 138
............................Security System . 255
...............................Serial Number . 416
...........................Service Intervals . 346
.............................Service Manual . 435
.........Service Station Procedures . 285
..........................Setting the Clock . 254
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 311
........................Shift Lock Release . 315
..............................Side Airbags . 10, 32
..........................Off Indicator . 34, 65
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 33
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 359
.............................Signaling Turns . 119
.....................................Snow Tires . 379
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 386
............................Specifications . 419
....................Specifications Charts . 418
................................Speed Control . 256
Speed-Sensitive Volume
.......Compensation (SVC) . 172, 202
.......................................Spotlights . 157
..........................Rear View Mirror . 144
...............Rear Window Defogger . 123
..............Reclining the Seat-backs . 138
.........Recommended Shift Points . 320
................Remote Audio Controls . 251
.....................Remote Transmitter . 132
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 370
................Engine Oil and Filter . 350
..........................................Fuses . 407
................................Light Bulbs . 359
................Maintenance Minder . 337
...........................................Tires . 375
.............................Wiper Blades . 370
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 24
.............Reporting Safety Defects . 434
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 289, 353
...............................Restraint, Child . 38
..................Reverse Gear Position . 313
................................Rotation, Tire . 378
Index
INDEX
S
VII
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：４４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４８
2010 Insight
..........SRS, Additional Information . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
..........AdvancedAirbagSystem .30
.............................Airbag Service . 36
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 35
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 34
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 33
........................SRS Components . 25
.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 64
..START (Ignition Key Position) . 128
.......................Starting the Engine . 303
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 303
................With a Dead Battery . 396
........Steam Coming from Engine . 398
Steering Wheel
................................Adjustment . 125
...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 128
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 383
......................................Sun Visors . 156
Supplemental Restraint
......................................System . 25
......................................Servicing . 36
.........................SRS Indicator . 34, 64
............System Components . 10, 25
.........................................SVC . 172, 202
..................................Synthetic Oil . 349
Taillights, Changing
..........................................Bulbs . 365
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 385
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 420
.....Emissions Control Systems . 425
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 284
..........State Emissions Testing . 428
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 427
...................Temperature Indicator . 67
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50
............................Theft Protection . 253
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 427
Tighten Fuel
.............................Cap Message . 286
..........................Time, Setting the . 254
....................................Tire Chains . 379
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 387
...........................Tire Information . 420
.................................Tire Labeling . 421
Tire Pressure Monitoring
............System (TPMS) . 328, 423
.............................Check TPMS . 329
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
...........................Indicator . 66, 328
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 423
...............................................Tires . 375
..............................Air Pressure . 376
........................................Chains . 379
.........................Checking Wear . 377
..........................Compact Spare . 386
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 420
......................................Inflation . 375
..................................Inspection . 376
..............................Maintenance . 377
...................................Replacing . 378
......................................Rotating . 378
................................Service Life . 377
Index
T
VIII
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：４８ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４４９
2010 Insight
Tires
...........................................Snow . 379
............................Specifications . 419
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 388
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 334
..................Emergency Towing . 412
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 356
...........................Fluid Selection . 356
..............Identification Number . 417
.............Shifting the Automatic . 312
.....................................Treadwear . 377
.................................Trip Meter . 78, 79
..................................Turn Signals . 119
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 385
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 420
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 284
..............USB Adapter Cable . 191, 240
.USB Flash Memory Device . 189, 238
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 352
................................Vanity Mirror . 156
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 296
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 418
....Vehicle Identification Number . 416
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
)
....................................System . 332
...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 332
.........................VSA Off Switch . 333
........VSA System Indicator . 65, 332
.............................Vehicle Storage . 383
.....................................Ventilation . 163
.................................................VIN . 416
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 349
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57
....................Warranty Coverages . 433
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 355
...................................Operation . 117
Wheels
.............Adjusting the Steering . 125
............Alignment and Balance . 377
.....................................Cleaning . 380
..........................Compact Spare . 386
...............................Nut Wrench . 388
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 147
................Operating the Power . 146
.........................Rear, Defogger . 163
Windshield
.....................................Cleaning . 117
...................................Defroster . 164
.....................................Washers . 117
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 370
...................................Operation . 117
....................................Worn Tires . 376
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 413
Index
INDEX
W
U
V
IX
０８／１２／２７ １２：２３：５４ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４５０
2010 Insight
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(CVTF):
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Front/Rear:
Spare Tire:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2
)
Use Honda CVT Fluid
(Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid) only
Fluid change capacity:
3.0 US qt (2.8
)
10.6 US gal (40
)
348
357
０８／１２／２７ １２：２４：０９ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０４５３
2010 Insight
This owner’s manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Insight. You may find
descriptions of equipment and
features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０８／１２／２７ １１：２６：０３ ３１ＴＭ８６００ ０００１
2010 Insight
